JP7606376B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, that can be controlled to create advantageous conditions for players.

There are gaming machines in which a launcher launches gaming balls, which are gaming media, into a gaming area, and when the gaming balls enter a winning area, such as a winning slot, provided in the gaming area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player.Furthermore, there are gaming machines (so-called pachinko machines) that are provided with a variable display device that can variably display (also called "variable") identification information, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device becomes a specific display result, the gaming state (the state of the gaming machine; specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled) is changed and a predetermined gaming value is given to the player .

The gaming value refers to the state of the variable winning ball device installed in the gaming area of the gaming machine becoming advantageous to the player in terms of making it easier for the ball to win, generating rights that lead to advantageous conditions for the player, or becoming more likely to meet the conditions for the payout of winning balls.

In a pachinko game machine, a "jackpot" occurs when a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of a special pattern (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the entry of a game ball into the start winning hole. The derived display means that a pattern (final stop pattern) is finally stopped and displayed. When a jackpot occurs, for example, the big prize winning hole opens a predetermined number of times, and the machine transitions to a big prize game state in which the ball is more likely to win. Then, during each opening period, if a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of big prize winning holes are won, the big prize winning hole closes. The number of times the big prize winning hole opens is fixed to a predetermined number (e.g., 15 rounds). An opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and the big prize winning hole closes when the opening time has elapsed even if the number of winning holes does not reach the predetermined number. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big prize winning hole may be called a round. Also, the game during a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in a state where a pattern other than the pattern that will be the final stop pattern (for example, the center pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) on a variable display device continues for a predetermined time and stops, oscillates, expands and contracts, or changes shape while matching a specific display result, or where multiple patterns fluctuate synchronously with the same pattern, or the positions of the displayed patterns are swapped, and the possibility of a jackpot occurring continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states), a reach effect is called a reach effect. Also, a reach state and its appearance are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, a variable display that includes a reach effect is referred to as a reach variable display. If the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it is a "miss" and the variable display state ends. The player plays while enjoying how to generate a jackpot.

Some of these gaming machines suggest that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state and can execute multiple types of suggestive effects with different degrees of expectation depending on the presentation mode, and use a displayed special image to change the suggestive effect to a presentation mode with a higher expectation. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that a pseudo consecutive prediction effect, a development prediction effect, or an active hold prediction effect is executed by a gift image displayed when the same type of gift box is opened. Also, for example, Patent Document 2 describes that information about a role stock is displayed on the screen, which communicates to the player that a strong prediction effect in which a moving object falls will be executed later.

JP 2015-134097 A JP 2018-50980 A

There is room for improving the marketability of gaming machines having the functions and configurations described in the above patent documents.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine with improved marketability.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A suggestion performance execution means for suggesting that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state and capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including at least a first suggestion performance and a second suggestion performance having different expectations depending on the performance mode;
a special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a plurality of special images in sequence and displaying a special display that allows a player to specify the number of the displayed special images ;
and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that changes the suggestive effect being executed in one performance mode to a performance mode having a higher expectation than the one performance mode by using the displayed special image,
The first suggestion performance is executed at a specific position,
The special image display effect execution means displays the special image in a manner that the special image moves so as to pass through a display position of the suggestion effect that is a target of the special effect during a period before the special effect is executed,
The special effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect by a predetermined pattern of performing a first special effect that changes the presentation mode of the first suggestive effect after the special image is stopped at the specific position, and a specific pattern of performing a second special effect that changes the presentation mode of the second suggestive effect after the special image passes the specific position without being stopped at the specific position,
The ratio of the advantageous state is different when the first special effect is executed by the predetermined pattern and when the second special effect is executed by the specific pattern,
The special effect execution means includes:
After executing the first special effect, the second special effect can be executed;
The second special effect can be executed after the first special effect is executed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed.
It is characterized by:
Such a configuration can improve marketability.
Other gaming machines include
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo consecutive patterns) to derive and display a display result, and capable of controlling the gaming machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A specific effect execution means (e.g., a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed as a variable display, and then the variable display is resumed;
A first suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a first suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the specific performance identification information has temporarily stopped;
a second suggestion performance execution means which suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state and is capable of executing a plurality of types of second suggestion performances (for example, a performance in which a title display is displayed in a predetermined manner, a performance in which an active display is displayed in a predetermined manner, a dialogue performance in which a dialogue display is displayed in a predetermined manner, a decorative pattern performance in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a predetermined manner, etc.) having different expectations depending on the performance mode;
A special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a special image (e.g., a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12);
and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, a chance-up effect in which the display color of the active display is changed from a normal color (white) to blue) by using the displayed special image to change a suggestive effect being executed in one performance mode to a performance mode with a higher expectation than the one performance mode.
The first suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing, as the first suggestion performance, a performance in which the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having an even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figures 19-33 and 19-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 19-34 and 19-35, a portion in which an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing the first suggestive performance even when the specific performance identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, is capable of continuing to display the effect display for a predetermined period of time after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-44, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestive performance is executed, the converging lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5);
The special effect execution means displays a special corresponding image (e.g., a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11) when the second suggestion effect is being executed, and executes a special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image (e.g., displays a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to an active display AH or a decorative pattern, and executes a chance-up effect in a manner in which a key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and rotates; see Figures 8-15 (9) to (15), Figures 8-17 (9) to 8-18 (17), etc.).
According to such a configuration, when a special performance using a special image is executed, the special image can be given a story-like quality, thereby enhancing the performance effect and increasing interest.
Furthermore, the suggestive effect can heighten the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the execution of the notification effect can heighten the player's sense of excitement at the temporary stop. In addition, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that there was no temporary stop and easing the player's sense of disappointment at not making a temporary stop, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game and improve marketability.
In another embodiment, a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) is provided that can variably display a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) to derive and display a display result, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As a variable display, at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started to when the display result is derived and displayed, a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) can be executed by temporarily stopping special identification information (e.g., a pseudo consecutive pattern) different from the effect identification information and then restarting the variable display (e.g., a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 18 );
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a first suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the special identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the special identification information has temporarily stopped;
a second suggestion performance execution means which suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state and is capable of executing a plurality of types of second suggestion performances (for example, a performance in which a title display is displayed in a predetermined manner, a performance in which an active display is displayed in a predetermined manner, a dialogue performance in which a dialogue display is displayed in a predetermined manner, a decorative pattern performance in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a predetermined manner, etc.) having different expectations depending on the performance mode;
A special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a special image (e.g., a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12);
and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, a chance-up effect in which the display color of the active display is changed from a normal color (white) to blue) by using the displayed special image to change a suggestive effect being executed in one performance mode to a performance mode with a higher expectation than the one performance mode.
The first suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing, as the first suggestion performance, a performance in which the visibility of the performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having an even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figures 19-33 and 19-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which the performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 19-34 and 19-35, a part in which the decorative patterns on the left and right sides are made invisible by displaying an effect image for a temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The first suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the first suggestion effect even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, is capable of continuing to display the effect display for a predetermined period of time after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-44, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the concentration lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5);
The special effect execution means displays a special corresponding image (e.g., a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11) when the second suggestion effect is being executed, and executes a special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image (e.g., displays a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to an active display AH or a decorative pattern, and executes a chance-up effect in a manner in which a key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and rotates; see Figures 8-15 (9) to (15), Figures 8-17 (9) to 8-18 (17), etc.).
According to such a configuration, when a special performance using a special image is executed, the special image can be given a story-like quality, thereby enhancing the performance effect and increasing interest.
Furthermore, the suggestive effect can heighten the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the execution of the notification effect can heighten the player's sense of excitement at the temporary stop. In addition, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that there was no temporary stop and easing the player's sense of disappointment at not making a temporary stop, thereby improving interest in the game and enhancing marketability.
Furthermore, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. An explanatory diagram showing examples of a jackpot determination table and a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 030IW. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern configuration and a breakdown of fluctuation time. FIG. This is a timing chart showing the execution timing of each performance during a super reach. An explanatory diagram showing the execution time of each performance in the first and second parts of the Super Reach. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stock effect pattern determination table. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a chance-up effect pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a title display change pattern determination table, an active display change pattern determination table, a dialogue display change pattern determination table, and a decorative design change pattern determination table. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a stock effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a stock effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing another specific example of the stock effect. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first and second parts of a super reach. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first and second parts of a super reach. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for an active display. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for an active display. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect targeting decorative symbols. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect targeting decorative symbols. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect targeting decorative symbols. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up promotion effect (fake). 13 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of keyhole (suggested) images and keyhole (real) images for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the operation of a second movable body. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. 1A is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13A is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a random number value when a prize is won, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for a reserved memory of a jackpot, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for a reserved memory of a losing result. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is a timing chart of a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance. This is an explanatory diagram of each performance period and performance content in the pseudo consecutive performance. 10A is a flowchart showing an example of a preview performance decision process (for use when executing pseudo consecutive performances), and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing whether or not a preview performance will be executed and the decision ratio of the preview performance to be executed. 10A is a flowchart showing an example of a preview performance decision process (for when pseudo consecutive performances are not being executed), and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing whether or not a preview performance will be executed and the decision ratio of the preview performances to be executed. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the special temporary stop notification effect execution decision ratio, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the temporary stop notification effect period decision ratio. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an output mode of sound output from a speaker. A figure showing the display mode of each image during the temporary stop suggestion performance period when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not stop. A figure showing the display mode of each image during the temporary stop suggestion performance period when pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. This is an explanatory diagram of the change in visibility of the left and right decorative patterns during the temporary stop suggestion performance period and the temporary stop notification performance period. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data that constitutes a display on an image display device. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display mode that executes pseudo consecutive performances. 13 is an explanatory diagram of image data constituting a display on an image display device in a modified example. FIG. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams showing the transparency of convergent lines and effect images in a modified example. A figure showing the display mode of an image display device in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance in a modified example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the play area), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided that perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, and jackpot types that allow few or no prize balls to be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc., are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the game control timer interrupt process described below is executed to resume the change of the special symbols from the state before the recovery.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

After executing such game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the big win game state and the small win game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing a look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process is ended.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 030IW)
Next, the characteristic feature 030IW of this embodiment will be described.

(Big hit determination table)
FIG. 8-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table and a variation pattern table. Among these, FIG. 8-1(A) is an example of a jackpot determination table used in this feature unit 030IW. As shown in FIG. 8-1(A), in this example, based on the hit determination random number, it is determined that the probability of a jackpot is about 1/300 in a low probability state, and that the probability of a jackpot is about 1/30 in a high probability state.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8-1(A), and the probability of winning may be different depending on whether the first special symbol changing display is executed or the second special symbol changing display is executed, for example.

In addition, for example, if the setting can be set to one of a number of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player, and a setting confirmation process or setting change process is executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value, the probability of winning may differ depending on which setting value is set.

In addition, multiple types of jackpots may be provided, each with a different degree of advantage. Specifically, the number of rounds in the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game may be different depending on the jackpot type. In this case, when it is decided that a jackpot has occurred based on the hit determination random number, the type of jackpot is determined based on the type determination random number.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
8-1(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 030IW. Of these, FIG. 8-1(B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for misses. Also, FIG. 8-1(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for big wins. Note that the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIG. 8-1(B) and (C) are both used in a low probability state. In a high probability state or a high base state, a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) with a different ratio of judgment values may be used.

In this example, as shown in Figure 8-1 (B), in the event of a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach A), fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach B), fluctuation pattern PA2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)), and fluctuation pattern PA2-5 (super reach B (with chance up)).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1(C), when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach A), fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (super reach B), fluctuation pattern PB2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)), and fluctuation pattern PB2-5 (super reach B (with chance up)).

In this example, during a super reach after a reach is achieved, a stock effect in which an item (in this example, a key) is stocked, and a chance up effect in which the stocked item (key) is used to change the presentation mode of other effects (i.e., to increase the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by other effects) can be executed. This configuration can increase interest during a super reach, and can also heighten the sense of anticipation for the stock effect and chance up effect. Hereinafter, executing a chance up effect using a stocked item (key) is also referred to as releasing the stocked item (key).

In this example, the super reach is a series of effects that unfold after the reach is established. When the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB2-2, and PB2-3 in which the chance up effect (and the stock effect) are not performed, there are two parts during the super reach: the first half of the super reach part A in which the pre-outpost effect that is the prelude to the battle effect is performed, and the second half of the super reach part in which the battle effect is performed. When the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB2-4, and PB2-5 in which the chance up effect (and the stock effect) are performed, there are three parts during the super reach: the super reach introduction part in which the stock effect is performed, the first half of the super reach part B in which the pre-outpost effect and the chance up effect are performed, and the second half of the super reach part in which the battle effect is performed. With this configuration, the stock effect and the chance up effect are performed in the period before the battle effect, which is the climax of the super reach, so that the effect can be gradually heightened and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-1 (B) and (C), a Super Reach in which a Chance Up effect (and a Stock effect) is executed is configured to have a higher chance of winning than a Super Reach in which a Chance Up effect (and a Stock effect) is not executed, and furthermore, a Super Reach B is configured to have a higher chance of winning than a Super Reach A. This configuration creates anticipation as to whether a Chance Up effect (and a Stock effect) will be executed and in which Super Reach it will be executed.

In addition, the example is not limited to that shown in FIG. 8-1. For example, a variation pattern may be set in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once or multiple times before a super reach, and the probability of a jackpot may differ depending on the number of pseudo consecutive performances.

Next, the configuration of each fluctuation pattern will be described. Figure 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the configuration of the fluctuation pattern and the breakdown of the fluctuation time. In this example, as shown in Figure 8-2, the elements that make up the fluctuation pattern (which can also be said to be the performances executed in the fluctuation pattern) are "normal fluctuation" which performs a fluctuation display in a normal manner, "shortened fluctuation" which performs a fluctuation display in a manner that is shorter than the normal fluctuation, "normal reach" which performs a normal reach as a reach performance, "super reach introduction (stock performance)" which performs a stock performance in the super reach introduction part as a reach performance, "super reach first half A (no chance up performance)" which performs a pre-outpost performance in the super reach first half part A, "super reach first half B (with chance up performance)" which performs a pre-outpost performance and a chance up performance in the super reach first half part B, "super reach second half (battle performance)" which performs a battle performance in the super reach second half part, and "win celebration performance" which performs a win celebration performance to celebrate the big win. Note that this is not limited to the example shown in Figure 8-2, and other elements such as an element that performs a pseudo consecutive performance may be provided.

As shown in Figure 8-2, fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is a fluctuation pattern that deviates from normal fluctuation, includes "normal fluctuation" (15 seconds) as an element that constitutes the fluctuation pattern, and has a total fluctuation time of 15 seconds. Fluctuation pattern PA1-2 is a fluctuation pattern that deviates from shortening fluctuation, includes "shortening fluctuation" (5 seconds) as an element that constitutes the fluctuation pattern, and has a total fluctuation time of 5 seconds.

Fluctuating pattern PA2-1 is a fluctuation pattern that goes through a normal reach and then a miss, and includes a "normal reach" (20 seconds) as an element that constitutes the fluctuation pattern, with a total fluctuation time of 20 seconds.

Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 are fluctuation patterns that go through the first half part A of the super reach where no chance-up effect is executed, and the second half part of the super reach, resulting in a miss. The elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include "first half A of the super reach (no chance-up effect)" (30 seconds) and "second half of the super reach (battle effect)" (40 seconds), and the total fluctuation time is 70 seconds.

Fluctuating patterns PA2-4 and PA2-5 are fluctuation patterns that go through the Super Reach introduction part, the Super Reach first half part B where the chance up effect is executed, and the Super Reach second half part, before ending in a miss. The elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include "Super Reach introduction (stock effect)" (30 seconds), "Super Reach first half B (with chance up effect)" (40 seconds), and "Super Reach second half (battle effect)" (40 seconds), with a total fluctuation time of 110 seconds.

Fluctuating pattern PB2-1 is a fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach leads to a jackpot, and the elements that make up the fluctuation pattern include a "normal reach" (20 seconds) and a "celebration effect when a win occurs" (20 seconds), with a total fluctuation time of 40 seconds.

Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 are fluctuation patterns that go through the first half of the Super Reach A where no chance up effect is executed, and the second half of the Super Reach, before a jackpot. The elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include the "first half of the Super Reach A (no chance up effect)" (30 seconds), the "second half of the Super Reach (battle effect)" (40 seconds), and the "celebration effect when a hit occurs" (20 seconds), and the total fluctuation time is 90 seconds.

Furthermore, the fluctuation patterns PB2-4 and PB2-5 are fluctuation patterns that result in a jackpot after passing through the Super Reach introduction part, the Super Reach first half part B where the chance up effect is executed, and the Super Reach second half part, and the elements that make up the fluctuation patterns include "Super Reach introduction (stock effect)" (30 seconds), "Super Reach first half B (with chance up effect)" (40 seconds), "Super Reach second half (battle effect)" (40 seconds), and "Hit celebration effect" (20 seconds), with a total fluctuation time of 130 seconds.

In the example shown in Figure 8-2, the performance times of the first half and second half of the Super Reach are the same for Super Reach A and Super Reach B, but this configuration is not limited to this, and the performance times may differ depending on the type of Super Reach.

(The timing of each performance during the Super Reach)
Next, the execution timing of the stock effect and the chance-up effect will be described. FIG. 8-3 is a timing chart showing an example of the execution timing of each effect.

In this example, the fluctuation time (which can also be said to be the total performance execution time) is determined by the fluctuation pattern determined on the main board 11 side, and the execution timing and performance execution time of the stock performance and chance up performance are determined based on the fluctuation pattern on the performance control board 12 side. However, as will be described in detail later, depending on the type of performance, the execution timing may be predetermined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Note that, without being limited to the configuration of this example, a fluctuation pattern may be set in which the execution timing and performance execution time of the stock performance and chance up performance are predetermined, and one of the fluctuation patterns may be determined on the main board 11 side.

Figure 8-3 (A) shows a case where a super reach without chance up is executed. In this case, as shown in Figure 8-3 (A), a pre-outpost performance is executed in the first half part A of the super reach, and a battle performance is executed in the second half part of the super reach.

Figure 8-3 (B) shows a case where a super reach with chance up is executed. In this case, a stock effect is executed first in the super reach introductory part. Then, in the first half part B of the super reach, a chance up effect is executed together with an outpost effect. Then, in the second half part of the super reach, a battle effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-3(B), in this example, there are three opportunities to stock items (keys) at maximum, A to C during the stock effect (timings (A) to (C) shown in FIG. 8-3(B)). Note that in this example, there are three opportunities to stock items (keys) during the stock effect, but this is not limited to the above configuration, and there may be a maximum of two or less, or four or more.

In addition, in this example, the title display (a presentation that displays a title display), active display (a presentation that displays an active display), dialogue display (a dialogue presentation that displays a dialogue display), and decorative pattern (a decorative pattern presentation that displays a decorative pattern) in the first half of the Super Reach each suggest different odds of a jackpot depending on the presentation mode, and are configured so that when the corresponding chance-up presentation is executed, the presentation mode changes (i.e., the suggested odds of a jackpot increase).

Specifically, when one item (key) is stocked in the stock performance, a chance-up performance is executed once for any of the title display (performance that displays the title display), active display (performance that displays the active display), dialogue display (speech performance that displays the dialogue display), and decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays the decorative pattern); when two items (keys) are stocked in the stock performance, a chance-up performance is executed once for each of two of the title display (performance that displays the title display), active display (performance that displays the active display), dialogue display (speech performance that displays the dialogue display), and decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays the decorative pattern); when three items (keys) are stocked in the stock performance, a chance-up performance is executed once for each of three of the title display (performance that displays the title display), active display (performance that displays the active display), dialogue display (speech performance that displays the dialogue display), and decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays the decorative pattern). Note that this is not limited to the configuration of this example, and chance-up performance may be executed multiple times for one performance. In this case, each time a chance-up effect is performed, a stocked item (key) is released.

As shown in FIG. 8-3(B), in this example, first to fifth timings (timings (1) to (5) shown in FIG. 8-3(B)) are provided as timings at which chance-up effects can be executed in the first half of the super reach. Note that in this example, the first to fifth timings in the first half of the super reach are determined for each variation pattern (or each type of super reach), but they may be common timings for all variation patterns (or types of super reach).

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), the chance-up effect targeting the title display (the effect that displays the title display) can be executed at the first timing, the chance-up effect targeting the active display (the effect that displays the active display) can be executed at the second or fourth timing, the chance-up effect targeting the dialogue display (the dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display) can be executed at the third timing, and the chance-up effect targeting the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) can be executed at the fifth timing.

Whether the chance-up effect targeting the active display (effect that displays the active display) is executed at the second timing or the fourth timing is determined by lottery. On the other hand, the timing at which the chance-up effect targeting the title display (effect that displays the title display), the dialogue display (dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display), or the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) is executed is fixedly determined for each variation pattern. Note that this configuration is not limited to the above, and the timing at which the chance-up effect targeting the active display (effect that displays the active display) is executed may be fixedly determined, or the timing at which the chance-up effect targeting the title display (effect that displays the title display), the dialogue display (dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display), or the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) is executed may be determined by lottery to be one of a plurality of timings.

The execution order of the effects that are the subject of the Chance Up Effects is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-3, and may be other orders. However, it is desirable that the later the order that the effect is the subject of the Chance Up Effects, the more likely it is that the Chance Up Effects will increase the likelihood of a jackpot (for example, the more likely it is that the effect will change to one with a higher chance of a jackpot). This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the timing at which the Chance Up Effects will be executed, and prevents players who have high hopes for the timing of the change (for example, their hopes grow as the first half of the Super Reach progresses) from being disappointed.

In this example, when the chance up performance is executed during the super reach, the stock performance is always executed, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a pattern in which the chance up performance is executed without the stock performance may also exist. In this case, for example, a variation pattern including the stock performance and the chance up performance and a variation pattern including the chance up performance without the stock performance are provided in advance, and when the main board 11 side determines the former variation pattern, the performance control board 12 side determines the performance contents of the stock performance and the chance up performance according to the modes shown in Figures 8-5 to 8-8 described later based on the determined variation pattern, and when the main board 11 side determines the latter variation pattern, the performance control board 12 side determines whether or not to execute the chance up performance and the type of chance up performance to be executed based on the determined variation pattern. In this way, by providing a pattern in which the chance up performance is executed without the stock performance, the presence of the chance up performance is increased, and the player can enjoy the performance with a sense of superiority in a situation in which the chance up performance is visualized to be executed in the future. Furthermore, in such cases, the system may be configured so that the probability of a large number of chance-up effects being executed is higher when the stock effect is executed in advance than when it is not executed (i.e., the chance-up effect is configured to increase the likelihood of a big win), giving priority to the execution of the stock effect and creating anticipation for the execution of the stock effect.

In addition, in this example, in a super reach, there is always a first half part of the super reach and a second half part of the super reach, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, when a stock effect is executed, the first half part of the super reach can be omitted, and the second half part of the super reach can follow the super reach introduction part, and a chance-up effect can be executed in the second half part. This configuration can prevent the total effect execution time of a reach with high expectations from becoming too long.

When providing an exceptional pattern in which the first half of the super reach is omitted, in the basic pattern that is not omitted, it is desirable that when the first half of the super reach develops into the second half of the super reach, other performance images are displayed in a manner that covers all the performance images related to the super reach at the boundary between the first and second halves, or that the performance contents are clearly divided between the first and second halves. For example, at the boundary between the first and second halves, an effect image or character related to the chance up performance shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) described later, or an image such as the text display of "Pending Rank Up" may be displayed in a manner that covers all the performance images related to the super reach. Also, for example, the performance contents may be divided by executing an outpost performance in the first half and executing a battle performance in the second half, or the performance contents may be divided by displaying a battle scene in the first half and a conclusion scene such as a character unleashing a special move in the second half. By doing so, even when the first half of the super reach is omitted, the flow of the performance can be made natural.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-3, for convenience, the intervals between the timing of stocking and the timing of the chance-up effect are uniform, but they do not have to be uniform and can be any timing within the period.

(Execution time of each performance in Super Reach)
Next, the execution time of each effect in the super reach will be described. FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the first half and the second half of the super reach.

Of the examples shown in Figure 8-4, Figure 8-4 (A) shows an example in which a chance up effect is executed for the title display (a performance that displays the title display) at the first timing (timing (1) shown in Figure 8-4) of the first half of the super reach, a chance up effect is executed for the dialogue display (a dialogue performance that displays the dialogue display) at the third timing (timing (3) shown in Figure 8-4), and a chance up effect is executed for the decorative pattern (a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern) at the fifth timing (timing (5) shown in Figure 8-4) (corresponding to the eighth performance pattern of the chance up effect described below).

In addition, Figure 8-4 (B) shows an example in which a chance-up effect is executed for the title display (a performance that displays the title display) at the first timing of the first half of the super reach, and a chance-up effect is executed for the decorative pattern (a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern) at the fifth timing (corresponding to the seventh performance pattern of the chance-up effect described below).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4, in the latter part of the super reach, a moving body effect is executed in which the moving body 32 operates before the fluctuation ends (for example, when announcing that control is being given to a jackpot).

In this example, as shown in the case where a dialogue effect without a chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-4(A) and the case where a dialogue effect with a chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect is configured to have a longer execution time when the effect mode changes due to the chance-up effect than when the effect mode does not change due to the chance-up effect. Specifically, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(B). With this configuration, when the chance-up effect is executed, a period for executing the chance-up effect and its target effect (for example, a period for announcing the change and the effect mode after the change) can be secured.

If the performance execution time of a performance were to change depending on whether or not a Chance Up performance is present, this would affect the execution timing of other performances, which could increase the amount of data related to performance control and complicate processing. Also, because the variable time (i.e. the total performance execution time) is fixedly determined in advance for each variable pattern, there is a risk that the performance will not fit within the time limit, or that there will be excess time. Therefore, in this example, the execution period of the movable body performance is made different depending on whether or not a Chance Up performance is present, thereby minimizing the impact on other performances and ensuring that all performances fit within the time limit without feeling unnatural.

In other words, in this example, the performance execution time T11 of the dialogue performance shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the performance execution time T12 of the dialogue performance shown in FIG. 8-4(B), while the performance execution time T21 of the movable body performance shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is shorter than the performance execution time T12 of the movable body performance shown in FIG. 8-4(B). And, the performance execution time of the chance-up performance targeting the decorative pattern (decorative pattern performance that displays decorative patterns) is the same.

For example, the movable body performance is controlled by moving the movable body 32 from the initial position to a performance position in front of the display area of the image display device 5 and keeping it at that performance position for a predetermined period of time, and controlling the image display device 5 to display an effect image or the like during the predetermined period to emphasize the movable body performance (at this time, the movable body 32 itself may be made to operate at the performance position), and then controlling the movable body 32 to move from the performance position to the initial position. In this way, the performance execution time of the movable body performance can be adjusted by lengthening or shortening the period during which the movable body 32 is at the performance position. By adjusting the performance execution time of the movable body performance in this way, it is possible to respond to small changes in the performance time depending on whether or not there is a chance up. With this configuration, while the performance execution time of the performance changes depending on whether or not there is a chance up performance, it is possible to prevent the amount of data related to the performance control from increasing and the processing from becoming complicated, and to fit all the performances within the time without any sense of incongruity.

The adjustment of the presentation time may be performed, for example, by a presentation other than the moving body presentation. For example, if the variable display result is a miss and the moving body presentation is not executed before the end of the change, the presentation image related to the super reach may be returned to the normal background image before the end of the change, and then the time for which the decorative pattern indicating a miss is temporarily stopped may be lengthened or shortened to adjust the time.

In this example, the chance-up effect can be executed multiple times, and the execution time is configured to differ depending on the chance-up effect being executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), chance-up effects that target decorative symbols have a longer execution time than chance-up effects that target title displays or dialogue displays. Although details will be described later, chance-up effects that target decorative symbols have a higher chance of winning than chance-up effects that target title displays or dialogue displays, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced by extending the execution time. With this configuration, various chance-up effects can be executed with suitable execution times, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this example, when one chance-up effect targeting one effect is being executed, other chance-up effects targeting other effects are not executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, chance-up effects with different targets are executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the chance-up effect being executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-5 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 030IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 030IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 030IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 030IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo-series is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines, in step 030IWS802, a chance eye pattern as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo-series (for example, a combination of patterns that is one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445", which is not a reach but is not a jackpot pattern, or a combination of patterns in which the middle pattern is a special pattern exclusive to pseudo-series (a pattern in which letters such as "NEXT" are written, but no numbers are written, and which cannot form a jackpot combination)). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 030IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot is reached based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach performance is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variation pattern includes a super reach (with chance up) (step 030IWS803). If the variation pattern does not include a super reach (with chance up), the process proceeds to step 030IWS811.

If the variation pattern includes a super reach (with chance up), the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern of the stock performance (step 030IWS804). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern of the chance up performance (step 030IWS805). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance mode after the change of the performance that is the target of the chance up performance (step 030IWS806). After that, the process proceeds to step 030IWS811. Details of steps 030IWS804, S805, and S806 will be described later.

In step 030IWS811, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the determined content of the performance (step 030IWS811).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 030IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 80. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 030IWS813). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

Step 030: By executing the processing of IWS813, a performance is realized according to the variation pattern and the content decided to be executed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 030IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 030IWS815).

Next, we will explain the details of the process for determining the presentation pattern of the stock presentation in the variable display start setting process (step 030IWS804).

In step 030IWS804, the stock effect pattern is determined, for example, by referring to the stock effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B).

Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach A (with chance up) fluctuation pattern PA2-4 or PB2-4, the first stock performance pattern determination table (Super Reach A) shown in Figure 8-6 (A) is referenced to determine the first performance pattern in which one item (key) is stocked as the performance result, or one of the second and third performance patterns in which two items (keys) are stocked as the performance result.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up), the second stock performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B) shown in Figure 8-6 (B) is referenced to determine the first performance pattern in which one item (key) is stocked as the performance result, the second or third performance pattern in which two items (keys) are stocked as the performance result, or the fourth or fifth performance pattern in which three items (keys) are stocked as the performance result.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-3 and 8-6, there are opportunities to stock items (keys) at timing A, timing B, and timing C during the stock performance. For example, in the first performance pattern, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, and no items (keys) are stocked at timing B and timing C. Also, for example, in the fifth performance pattern, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no items (keys) are stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C. In this way, in this example, there are opportunities to stock one or multiple items (keys) at each timing.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B), each performance pattern of the stock performance is configured to have a different probability of being determined at the time of a jackpot. In other words, the expected probability of a jackpot is configured to differ depending on the number of items (keys) stocked and the timing of stocking. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the performance patterns of the stock performance.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B), the display patterns of the stock effects that can be determined are different for Super Reach A and Super Reach B. Specifically, in Super Reach A, a maximum of two items (keys) can be stocked, and in Super Reach B, a maximum of three items (keys) can be stocked. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to which type of Super Reach will result in the stock effect.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 8-6 (A) to (B), the game is configured so that an item (key) is stocked at timing A regardless of the presentation pattern (in other words, when the stock presentation is executed, at least one item (key) is stocked). This configuration can prevent the player from losing all expectations about the stock presentation or losing interest in the stock presentation due to cases where an item is not stocked even when the stock presentation is executed.

In this example, the probability of a big win is higher when the stock effect is executed than when it is not executed, so the player will be looking forward to the occurrence of the stock effect. Therefore, for example, in the normal reach before the start of the super reach (the state in which the left and right symbols are ready and the middle symbol is changing on the image display device 5), a symbol that suggests that the stock effect will be executed or a symbol that teases whether it will be executed or not may be executed. For example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal reach state, a special symbol such as a "key stock time symbol" may be stopped as the middle symbol to transition to the stock effect. Also, for example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal reach state, the middle symbol may start to change at high speed, and after the screen changes to the super reach (covering the display area of the image display device 5 by whiteout, etc.), the transition may be made to the stock effect instead of the first half part of the super reach (outpost effect).

Next, we will explain the details of the process (step 030IWS805) that determines the presentation pattern for the chance-up presentation in the variable display start setting process.

In step 030IWS805, for example, the chance-up effect pattern determination table shown in Figures 8-7 (A) to (E) is referenced to determine the chance-up effect pattern.

Specifically, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 or PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, the first chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach A: 1 chance up) shown in Figure 8-7 (A) is referenced to determine one of the first to third performance patterns that will perform the chance up performance once.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 or PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, the second chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach A: Chance Up twice) shown in Figure 8-7 (B) is referenced to determine one of the fifth to sixth performance patterns in which the chance up performance is performed twice.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, the third chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B: 1 chance up) shown in Figure 8-7 (C) is referenced to determine one of the first to fourth performance patterns that will perform the chance up performance once.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of the fluctuation patterns PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, the fourth chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B: Chance Up twice) shown in Figure 8-7 (D) is referenced to determine one of the fifth to seventh performance patterns in which the chance up performance is performed twice.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is either of the fluctuation patterns PA2-5 or PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with Chance Up) and the number of items stocked determined in step 030IWS804 is 3, the 5th chance up performance pattern determination table (Super Reach B: Chance Up 3 times) shown in Figure 8-7 (E) is referenced to determine the 8th performance pattern in which the chance up performance is performed 3 times.

For example, in the first presentation pattern of the chance-up presentation, a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the title display (presentation that displays the title display) is executed once. Also, for example, in the eighth presentation pattern of the chance-up presentation, a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the title display (presentation that displays the title display), a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the dialogue display (dialogue presentation that displays the dialogue display), and a chance-up presentation that changes the presentation mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern presentation that displays a decorative pattern) are each executed.

In this example, before the chance-up effect is executed, a chance-up prompting effect is executed to prompt whether or not the chance-up effect will be executed. There are chance-up prompting effects in which the chance-up effect is executed after the effect and those in which it is not executed, and when distinguishing between the two, the former are also called chance-up prompting effects (true) and the latter chance-up prompting effects (false).

In the chance-up teasing performance (true), an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to a stocked item (key) (e.g., keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13) is displayed, and then an image showing a keyhole (e.g., keyhole (real) image 030IWG11) is displayed. On the other hand, in the chance-up teasing performance (false), an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to a stocked item (key) (e.g., keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13) is displayed, and then an image showing a keyhole (e.g., keyhole (real) image 030IWG11) is not displayed, and the image suggesting a keyhole (e.g., keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13) is erased.

In this example, a chance-up teasing effect (true) is always executed before a chance-up effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-7, for example, in the fourth and seventh chance-up effect patterns, a chance-up teasing effect (false) is executed that teases whether or not a chance-up effect targeting a dialogue display (a dialogue effect that displays a dialogue display) will be executed, but which ultimately will not be executed. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to which effect the chance-up effect will be executed. Note that, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-7, a chance-up teasing effect (false) may be executed when a chance-up effect is not executed and there are still stocked items (keys) remaining.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-7 (A) to (E), each presentation pattern of the chance-up effects is configured to have a different probability of being determined at the time of a jackpot (i.e., different jackpot expectation). This configuration allows players to focus on the presentation pattern of the chance-up effects. In particular, the later the timing of the change that is the subject of the chance-up effects (i.e., in the order of decorative pattern change > dialogue display change > title display change), the higher the jackpot expectation. This configuration allows players to focus on which chance-up effects are executed at which timing.

In addition, in this example, the chance-up effect, which changes the presentation mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern presentation that displays decorative patterns), is not executed during Super Reach A, but is configured to be executable only during Super Reach B. This configuration allows you to pay attention to which type of Super Reach the chance-up effect is executed during.

It should be noted that the presenter may be configured to be able to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol presentation that displays a decorative symbol) during any type of super reach, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-7. In addition, in this example, the presenter is configured to execute a maximum of three chance-up effects, but the presenter is not limited to this configuration and may execute a maximum of four chance-up effects corresponding to all possible target effects, or may execute a chance-up effect targeting the active display at both the second and fourth timings, so that a maximum of five chance-up effects can be executed.

Next, we will explain the details of the process (step 030IWS806) that determines the presentation mode after the change in the presentation that is the target of the chance-up presentation in the variable display start setting process.

In step 030IWS806, if it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the title display (presentation that displays the title display), the change pattern is determined by referring to the title display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(A). If it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the active display (presentation that displays the active display), the change pattern is determined by referring to the active display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(B). If it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the dialogue display (dialogue presentation that displays the dialogue display), the change pattern is determined by referring to the dialogue display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(C). If it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the presentation mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern presentation that displays the decorative pattern), the change pattern is determined by referring to the decorative pattern change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(D).

In this example, the title display (a presentation that displays the title display), active display (a presentation that displays the active display), dialogue display (a dialogue presentation that displays the dialogue display) and decorative pattern (a decorative pattern presentation that displays a decorative pattern) are configured so that the color tone of the presentation image related to the presentation suggests the likelihood of a jackpot. For example, the following colors are configured to suggest the highest likelihood of a jackpot: gold > red > green > blue > normal color (white).

When the first change pattern is selected as the title display change pattern, the title display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, and when the second change pattern is selected, the title display changes from the normal color (white) to green.

In addition, if the first change pattern is determined as the active display change pattern, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to blue at the first timing of the first half of the super reach, if the second change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the first timing, if the third change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the third timing, and if the fourth change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to red at the third timing.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a look-ahead preview effect that changes the pending display (and the active display), a chance-up effect targeting the active display may be executed according to the performance pattern (for example, the timing of the change and the display state after the change are determined) that is determined as the look-ahead preview effect at the time of the initial winning.

When the first change pattern is determined as the change pattern for the dialogue display, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, when the second change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to green, and when the third change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to red.

In addition, if the change pattern of the decorative design is determined to be the first change pattern, the decorative design will change from the normal color (white) to green, if the second change pattern is determined, the decorative design will change from the normal color (white) to red, and if the third change pattern is determined, the decorative design will change from the normal color (white) to gold.

In this example, when the presentation mode of the target presentation changes due to the chance-up presentation, the tendency of the presentation mode after the change is configured to differ depending on the timing of the change. Specifically, the chance-up presentation targeted at the active display is configured to be more likely to change to a presentation mode with a higher expectation at the third timing, which is later than the first timing. Also, the chance-up presentation targeted at the decorative pattern is configured to be executed later and to be more likely to change to a presentation mode with a higher expectation than the chance-up presentation targeted at the title display, active display, or dialogue display. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the timing at which the chance-up presentation will be executed, and to prevent disappointment for players who have high expectations for the timing of the change (for example, expectations grow as the first half of the super reach progresses).

In addition, if the color displayed after the change at an earlier timing suggests a higher expectation level than the color displayed after the change at a later timing, the presentation mode (color) displayed after the change at the later timing may be re-determined so that a drop in expectation level does not occur.

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the Super Reach effect including the stock effect and the chance up effect will be described. Figures 8-9 to 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the stock effect. In Figures 8-9 to 8-10, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

(Stock effect (fifth effect pattern))
Figures 8-9 to 8-10 show the stock presentation of the fifth presentation pattern, in which one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C.

Specifically, when the variable display starts and a reach is achieved, a decorative pattern showing "6" is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5. Then, when the stock performance starts, the title display of the stock performance, "Key Stock" and "TIME", is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1). Note that the display mode of the title display may suggest the number of items (keys) to be stocked in the stock performance that starts later, or that a large number of items (keys) will be stocked. For example, the title display is generally displayed in a normal color (white), but when it is displayed in red, it may suggest that a larger number of items (keys) will be stocked than when it is displayed in a normal color (white).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), except during special effects, the active display AH is displayed as the active display in the lower left part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the small symbol KZ corresponding to the special symbol and the reserved memory number HS indicating the number of reserved memories are displayed in the center right part of the display area of the image display device 5.

Next, when the stock effect starts, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), a timer image 030IWG01 indicating the remaining time of the stock effect and a "Key Stock Time" display 030IWG02 indicating that the stock effect is in progress are displayed. Furthermore, when timing A of the stock effect arrives, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), character A prompting the user to press push button 31B, the valid operation period, and an image resembling push button 31B are displayed.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, one key is stocked at timing A, so when a press of push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in Figure 8-9 (3), the text display "Stock x 1" indicating that one key has been stocked as an item, an image resembling a key, and an effect image emphasizing them are displayed in a manner that covers the background image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (4), a visual effect is displayed in which one key moves from the top left to the bottom right of the screen of the image display device and is stored (for example, a display in which it appears as if the key is flying in from the back left of the screen and being stored in the front right of the screen).

When the display showing the keys being stocked ends, a display showing the progress of the stock display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (5). Specifically, a display showing character A riding a swing is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining time shown in the timer image 030IWG01 is displayed decreasing. At this time, a stock key image 030G03 is also displayed, showing the number of keys currently stocked.

Next, at timing B of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (6), character A is displayed to prompt the player to press push button 31B, along with an image of the valid operation period and push button 31B. Note that in this example, a display prompting the player to press push button 31B is displayed at timings A, B, and C of the stock effect, and character A's pose is configured to be different for each. Therefore, even if the display prompting the player to press the push button is displayed multiple times, the player's interest can be increased at each timing without becoming bored.

In the stock presentation of the fifth presentation pattern, keys are not stocked at timing B, so when a press of push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in FIG. 8-9 (7), an image of a close-up of character A's face, the character "!?", and an effect image that emphasizes them are displayed in a manner that covers the background image, and no image indicating that keys will be stocked is displayed.

In this way, by executing an effect in which a character image is displayed instead of a key when no keys are stocked, the disappointment of not being able to stock a key can be reduced. In addition, in the stock effect of this example, even if only one key is stocked, the effect execution time is the same as when three keys are stocked. Therefore, if there is a period of time when no keys are stocked even when the button is pressed, the effect may become redundant and interest may decrease. Therefore, by displaying a character image instead of a key when no keys are stocked in this way to liven up the effect, the stock effect does not lose excitement even when the number of keys stocked is small. Note that the character image displayed when no keys are stocked does not have to be of one type, but may be different depending on the type of super reach being executed. In this way, future developments can be predicted by the displayed character image, and the character image can be given a meaning in terms of the effect.

The effect display shown in FIG. 8-9(7) is performed when no keys are stocked (i.e., indicates that no keys are stocked), so after the image displayed in the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9(7) is erased, the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9(8) is displayed in which the stock effect progresses, but the number of stocked keys indicated by the stock key image 030G03 does not increase. Note that the display period for the effect display when an item is stocked shown in FIG. 8-9(3) is set shorter than the display period for the effect display when an item is not stocked shown in FIG. 8-9(7). This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from feeling annoyed or losing interest by displaying undesirable effects for a long time without the effect of increasing the number of stocks.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (9), a display showing the progress of the stock effect is displayed, and when timing C of the stock effect arrives, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (10), character A prompting the player to press push button 31B, the valid operation period, and an image resembling push button 31B are displayed.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, two keys are stocked at timing C, so when a press of push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in Figure 8-10 (11), the text display "Stock x 2" indicating that two keys have been stocked as items, an image resembling a key, and an effect image emphasizing them are displayed in a manner that covers the background image.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (12), an effect display is performed in which two keys move from the top left to the bottom right of the screen of the image display device and are stored (for example, a display in which the keys appear to fly in from the back left of the screen and be stored in the front right of the screen).

When the display showing the stocking of keys ends, a display showing the progress of the stocking display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (13). Then, when the remaining time shown in timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (14), a display prompting the user to press push button 31B is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (15).

Then, when a press of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in FIG. 8-10 (16), the text display "Character A VS Enemy Character B" indicating the battle cards in the battle performance, as well as Character A and Enemy Character B, are displayed, and the stock performance ends.

In this example, when a super reach with chance up is executed, a stock effect is first executed in the super reach introductory part. Then, in the first half of the super reach, a prelude effect such as a dialogue effect in which character A and enemy character B face each other and talk is executed primarily, and a chance up effect is executed incidentally. After that, in the second half of the super reach, a battle effect in which character A and enemy character B cross swords is executed. Note that, when a super reach without chance up is executed, a prelude effect such as a dialogue effect in which character A and enemy character B face each other and talk is executed in the first half of the super reach, and a battle effect in which character A and enemy character B cross swords is executed in the second half of the super reach.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10 (16), the match card for the battle performance is "character A vs. enemy character B", but in reality, multiple types of match cards (different types of friendly and enemy characters) are provided, and the match card is determined according to the type of super reach. That is, the pressing of the push button 31B triggers the display of the match card for the battle performance, thereby announcing the type of super reach. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation and tension when the push button 31B is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 8-10 (15). For example, in addition to or instead of the type of super reach, the types of friendly and enemy characters may be different depending on the expectation of a jackpot. Also, for example, if the performance stage is configured to transition depending on the game period or game state, such as the number of changes, a character previously associated with the performance stage may be made to fight against one of the enemy characters (which may be one of multiple enemy characters previously associated with the performance stage, or may be an enemy character determined by lottery).

(Stock effect (first effect pattern))
Next, we will explain the stock presentation of the first presentation pattern in which one item (key) is stocked at timing A, and no item (key) is stocked at timing B and timing C, resulting in one key being stocked.

When the stock effect of the first effect pattern is executed, after the screen transitions of Figures 8-9 (1) to (8), a stock key image 030G03 indicating that there is one stocked key is displayed as shown in Figure 8-11 (9), and an effect display showing the progress of the stock effect is displayed. Then, as shown in Figure 8-11 (10), when the remaining time shown in the timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, a display is displayed encouraging the user to press the push button 31B as shown in Figure 8-11 (11).

When a press of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period (or when the valid operation period has elapsed), as shown in FIG. 8-11 (12), the text display "Character A VS Enemy Character B" indicating the battle cards in the battle performance, as well as Character A and Enemy Character B, are displayed, and the stock performance ends.

(Overview of the first and second half of Super Reach)
Next, an overview of the effects in the first and second parts of the Super Reach will be explained. Figures 8-12 to 8-13 are explanatory diagrams showing an overview of the effects in the first and second parts of the Super Reach. In Figures 8-12 to 8-13, the effects screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

When the Super Reach introductory part (stock effect) ends and the first half of the Super Reach begins, the title of Super Reach B, "A Deadly Battle Between Two People," is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-12 (1).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (1), a mini character A image 030IWC10 and a mini key image 030IWG10 representing the number of keys stocked in the stock effect are displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. In this example, it is assumed that three keys have been stocked in advance in the stock effect, and the three keys are displayed in a manner that moves around the mini character A. Note that in this example, the keys stocked in the stock effect of the super reach introduction part are displayed as a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12 in the first half of the super reach.

In addition, a decorative pattern indicating "6" is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R of the image display device 5, and an active display AH is displayed at the lower left side of the display area of the image display device 5 as an active display, and a small pattern KZ corresponding to the special pattern and a reserved memory number HS indicating the number of reserved memories are displayed at the center right side of the display area of the image display device 5.

Next, as a prelude, as shown in FIG. 8-12(2), character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other, and after that, as shown in FIG. 8-12(3), line image 030IWG20 is displayed saying "I'll kill you!"

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (4), character A image 030IWC01 is displayed alone, along with a line image 030IWG20 saying "I won't go easy on you."

As shown in Figures 8-12 (2) to (4), when the prelude effect is being executed and the chance-up effect is not being executed, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

When a chance-up effect targeting a dialogue effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (5), a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 resembling a keyhole is displayed overlapping the dialogue image 030IWG20. Also at this time, a mini-character A image 030IWC10 holding a key is displayed next to the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11. This type of effect display indicates that the target of the chance-up effect is a dialogue effect.

Next, to display the effect of the key being inserted into the keyhole, the key image 030IWG12 and keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-12 (6), and then, to display the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened), the key image 030IWG12 rotated in the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-12 (7).

When the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened) is displayed, the dialogue image 030IWG20 changes from the normal color (white) to blue, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (8). This effect changes the presentation style of the dialogue effect as a result of the chance-up effect.

After that, when the first half of the Super Reach (outpost effect and chance up effect) ends and the second half of the Super Reach begins, a battle effect begins in which character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02 cross swords, as shown in Figure 8-13 (9).

When character A wins against enemy character A, the word "Victory" is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-13 (10), and then the combination of "666" decorative symbols, which is the jackpot symbol, is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-13 (11).

(Chance Up Production)
Next, the chance-up effect outlined in Fig. 8-12 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 8-14 to Fig. 8-18. Fig. 8-14 to Fig. 8-18 also show the part of the chance-up effect that is omitted in Fig. 8-12.

Figures 8-14 to 8-15 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of chance-up effects that target active displays. Note that in Figures 8-14 to 8-15, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), an outpost display is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face off against each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), a display is executed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. Also, at this time, a display is executed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Note that the performance images related to the outpost performance (e.g., character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in Figure 8-14 (1) and onwards, but are omitted from the illustration for simplicity. In this example, the performance images related to the outpost performance have a lower display priority than performance images related to the chance up performance (e.g., key image, keyhole image, mini character image, etc.) and performance images related to the performance that is the target of the chance up performance (e.g., title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and are displayed in a lower layer than those images. The details will be described later, but the performance images related to the outpost performance are covered by the performance images related to the chance up performance at the timing of Figure 8-15 (13) to (14).

Next, when the chance-up teasing performance (true) is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (2), a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13, which suggests that a keyhole will appear, is displayed in the center of the display area. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 stop moving around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10. In addition, an "!" is displayed next to the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 to indicate the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (3), a display effect begins in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the active display AH that is the target of the chance-up effect, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (5), a display effect is displayed in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 overlaps the active display AH. At this time, triangular marks are displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 to indicate that it is shrinking.

Also, as shown in Figures 8-14 (2) to (5), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH. This configuration allows you to focus on the chance-up teasing effect and the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (6), the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette on the active display AH, and a performance display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 also become a silhouette, and a performance display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (7), a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 that resembles a keyhole is displayed on the active display AH. This type of effect display makes it clear that the chance-up teasing effect being executed is a chance-up teasing effect (true), and also makes it clear that the target of the chance-up effect is the active display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(8), an effect is displayed in which character A, located at the front of the screen, throws a key into keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, located at the back of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15(9), an effect is displayed in which the key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front of the screen toward the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 at the back. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-15(9), the key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed at a size larger than the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, and then, as shown in FIG. 8-15(10), it is displayed as if it is moving toward the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller to represent moving away). This configuration draws attention to the key image 030IWG12 acting on the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, enhancing the presentation effect of the chance-up presentation.

Then, to display the effect of the key being inserted into the keyhole, a key image 030IWG12 and a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-15 (11), and to display the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened), a key image 030IWG12 rotated in the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-15 (12).

When the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), character A and the text "Pending Rank Up" are displayed along with an effect image that covers the image related to the outpost effect. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), by displaying a close-up of character A along with an effect image that covers the image related to the outpost effect, the awkward feeling of a chance-up effect being executed in the middle of the outpost effect is reduced.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14), character A and the text display "Pending Rank Up" are erased while the effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect is still displayed, the active display AH becomes a silhouette, and an effect display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed again, and an effect display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed around it.

In this example, when a chance-up effect targeting an active display is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14), the image display device 5 displays in the upper layers in the following order: decorative pattern > mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 > effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect > active display AH > image related to the outpost effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (15), the effect image covering the image related to the outpost performance is erased, and the active display AH is displayed in a color that has changed from the normal color (white) to blue. Also, because one of the stocks has been released and an item (key) has been consumed due to the chance-up performance targeting the active display, the number of mini key images 030IWG10 moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10 has decreased by one.

In this example, when a performance that is the target of the chance-up performance is being performed, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed, and the chance-up performance is performed in a manner in which the key image 030IWG12 acts on the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11. Specifically, as shown in Figs. 8-14 to 8-15, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, and the chance-up performance is performed in a manner in which the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and rotates. With this configuration, when a chance-up performance using the key image 030IWG12 is performed, the performance effect can be enhanced by providing a story-like element in which the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and rotates (i.e., the key is opened), and the interest can be increased.

In addition, in this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed approximately in the center of the effect image related to the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect (see, for example, FIG. 8-14 (7)), and when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed, a chance-up effect that targets other effects is not executed. For example, when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, a chance-up effect that targets the dialogue display is not executed. This configuration makes it easier to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the chance-up effect, and also draws attention to the timing at which the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed.

In this example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (8), the stored key image and character image (i.e., mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10) are displayed moving, and when the chance-up effect is executed, an effect is displayed in which the character throws a key into the keyhole. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the key image and to enhance the effect of the chance-up effect.

In this example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (6), the mini key image 030IWG10 moves in a manner that revolves around the mini character A image 030IWC10, and stops moving when the chance-up effect is executed. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the key image and to enhance the effect of the chance-up effect.

In this example, the key is configured to look different when it is stocked and when it is used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (8), when the key image is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area in the stock performance, the key image is displayed smaller in size than when it is displayed to move around the character in the outpost performance as shown in FIG. 8-12 (1). This configuration makes it possible to make the key image easier to see in the stock performance in which the key is the main focus, and to make the key less conspicuous when the outpost performance is the main focus. For example, the key image may be displayed larger when the key is stocked in the stock performance than when the character throws the key into the keyhole in the chance up performance (initial most enlarged state). This configuration allows the stock to have more impact when it is opened than when the key is stocked. Also, by making it more impactful, the player can be impressed that the performance is favorable, even if the performance that is the target of the chance up performance has a low expectation.

Next, we will explain a specific example of a chance-up effect that targets decorative symbols. Figures 8-16 to 8-18 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of a chance-up effect that targets decorative symbols. Note that in Figures 8-16 to 8-18, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (1), an outpost performance is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face off against each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (1), a performance display is executed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 moves as if circling the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (1), the movable body 32 is located in an initial position that covers a portion of the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5.

Note that the performance images related to the outpost performance (e.g., character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in Figure 8-16 (1) and onwards, but are omitted from the illustration for simplicity. In this example, the performance images related to the outpost performance have a lower display priority than performance images related to the chance-up performance (e.g., key images, keyhole images, mini-character images, etc.) and performance images related to the performance that is the target of the chance-up performance (e.g., title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and are displayed on a lower layer than those images.

Next, when the chance-up teasing performance (true) is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (2), a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13, which suggests that a keyhole will appear, is displayed in the center of the display area. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 stop moving around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10. In addition, an "!" is displayed next to the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 to indicate the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. In addition, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 displayed during the chance-up teasing effect is represented by a dotted line in this example as shown in Figure 8-16, but in reality it has a transparency that allows the performance images in lower layers (for example, performance images related to the outpost performance) to be visible, and is designed to not interfere with the content of the super reach (i.e. the outpost performance) as much as possible even while the chance-up teasing effect is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(3), a display effect is started in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-16(4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the decorative pattern display area that is the target of the chance-up display, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-16(5), a display effect is performed in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 reaches the center position (corresponding to the center decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R. At this time, a triangular mark indicating that the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is shrinking is displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. Also, a display effect is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(6), the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette, and a glowing effect image is displayed around it. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 also become a silhouette, and a glowing effect image is displayed around them. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-16(5) to FIG. 8-16(6), when changing the pose of the mini character A, a silhouette image is first displayed, and then the mini character A image in the changed pose is displayed from the silhouette image. In this way, by switching images between silhouette images rather than using material data that causes the mini character to move and change its pose, the material data can be simplified and the man-hours and costs involved in production can be reduced.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (7), a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed near the center position (the position corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R. This type of effect display makes it clear that the chance up teasing effect being executed is a chance up teasing effect (true), and that the target of the chance up effect is a decorative pattern.

In this example, when executing a chance-up effect for a dialogue effect, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed approximately at the center of the dialogue image 030IWG20 as shown in FIG. 8-12 (5), while when executing a chance-up effect for a decorative pattern, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area from the center position (corresponding to the center decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R as shown in FIG. 8-16 (7). This configuration makes it possible to prevent the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 from being covered by the movable body 32 and becoming difficult to see, and allows the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 to be displayed appropriately according to the characteristics of the target effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(8), an effect is displayed in which character A, located at the front of the screen, throws a key into the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, located at the back of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), an effect is displayed in which the key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front of the screen toward the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 at the back. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), the key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed at a size larger than the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, and then, as shown in FIG. 8-17(10), it is displayed as if it is moving toward the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller to represent moving away).

Then, to display the effect of the key being inserted into the keyhole, a key image 30IWG12 and a keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17 (11), and to display the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened), a key image 030IWG12 rotated in the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17 (12).

When the effect of the key turning in the keyhole (i.e., the lock being opened) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13), character A and the text display "Pattern Rank Up" are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (14), while character A and the text display of "Pattern Rank Up" are still displayed, an effect is displayed in which the left decorative pattern begins to rotate in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and the right decorative pattern begins to rotate in the right decorative pattern display area 5R. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13) to (14), by displaying character A in close-up, the effect image related to the outpost effect is obscured, reducing the sense of incongruity caused by the chance-up effect being executed in the middle of the outpost effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (15), an image of Character A and Character B standing side by side is displayed near the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and a performance display is performed in which the rotating left and right decorative patterns move to a position superimposed on the image. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (16), a glowing effect image is displayed around the rotating left and right decorative patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (17), the glowing effect image around the left and right decorative patterns is erased, and the left and right decorative patterns change from the normal color (white) to gold and are displayed with the word "GOLD" written on them, and the left and right decorative patterns stop rotating.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (18), the gold right and left decorative patterns are displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and the remaining prelude effects are executed. Since all stocked keys have been used due to the chance-up effect targeting the decorative patterns being executed, the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and mini key image 030IWG10 are no longer displayed, but no special effects are executed to indicate that they will not be displayed. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the mini key image 030IWG10, which is no longer in use, from standing out.

In this example, regardless of where the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed (i.e., regardless of which effect is the target of the chance-up effect), at least a part of the chance-up teasing effect is executed in a common manner. Specifically, as shown in Figures 8-14 (2) to (5) and 8-16 (2) to (5), even if the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect are different, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is initially displayed in a close-up across the entire screen, and is then displayed in a common manner that is gradually reduced. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to whether the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed, i.e., whether the chance-up effect is executed, as well as which effect is the target of the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this example, regardless of the position where the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed in the chance-up effect (i.e., regardless of the type of effect being targeted), an image is displayed in a common display position to notify that the performance mode of the target effect will change. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display "Pending rank up" or "Pattern rank up" are displayed to notify that the performance mode will change. This configuration makes it easier to recognize that the performance mode of the target effect will change due to the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this example, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the presentation mode of the target presentation changes in the chance-up presentation. Specifically, as shown in Figures 8-15 (13) to (15) and Figures 8-17 (13) to 8-18 (17), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the active display or decorative pattern mode changes. This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the change in presentation mode of the target presentation due to the chance-up presentation.

In this example, the effect images relating to at least some of the effects among the multiple types of effects that are the target of the chance-up effect have a higher display priority than the key image, even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. Specifically, the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the key image, even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. With this configuration, it is possible to ensure visibility for some effects in any situation. Furthermore, for effect images relating to other effects (for example, images that are not information related to the progress of the game, such as dialogue displays or title displays), the display priority is set to be lower than that of the key image when the key image acts on the keyhole image, thereby realizing a realistic effect and enhancing the effect of the effect.

In this example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) and Fig. 8-17 (13), when executing the chance-up effect, it is possible to display notification images such as effect images and characters covering the effect image related to the outpost effect, and text displays such as "reserved rank up" and "pattern rank up". Then, it is possible to execute the chance-up effect by using a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect when the notification images are displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-17 (13) to Fig. 8-18 (17), a pattern in which the presentation mode of the decorative pattern changes while the character or text display of "pattern rank up" remains), and a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the target effect at a time other than when the notification image is displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) to (15), a pattern in which the presentation mode of the active display changes after the effect image, character, or text display of "reserved rank up" is erased). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that the presentation mode of the target effect will change by displaying the notification image, and it is possible to execute the chance-up effect suitably by using a presentation pattern according to the target effect. In particular, with the former, the effect can be made more spectacular by seamlessly increasing the chance (i.e., changing the presentation mode of the target effect) while the notification image is displayed, and with the latter, the chance is increased (i.e., changing the presentation mode of the target effect) after the notification image is erased, preventing an increase in the amount of data related to effect control.

In addition, in this example, a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect when the notification image is displayed has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a presentation pattern that changes the presentation mode of the target effect at a time other than when the notification image is displayed. Specifically, a chance-up effect in which the mode of the decorative pattern changes has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a chance-up effect in which the mode of the active display changes (see Figure 8-7). With this configuration, the expectation can be varied depending on the flashiness of the presentation pattern, increasing interest.

In this example, the notification image can identify which effect's presentation mode has changed, and an image different from the presentation image related to that effect is used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), the text display "Pending Rank Up" or "Pattern Rank Up" is displayed. Such a configuration makes it easy to recognize which effect's presentation mode has changed.

In this example, the notification image displayed during the execution of the chance-up effect is displayed in a manner that covers the effect image related to the super reach (outpost effect), but the effects that are the subject of the chance-up effect include those in which the effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which it is not covered, and the latter have a higher probability of winning than the former. Specifically, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) and Fig. 8-17 (13), the notification image includes an effect image that covers the effect image related to the outpost effect, as well as a character and the text display of "reserved rank up" or "pattern rank up". This notification image covers the active display AH, but does not cover the decorative pattern. And the chance-up effect in which the state of the decorative pattern changes has a higher probability of winning than the chance-up effect in which the state of the active display changes (see Fig. 8-7). With this configuration, the expectation level can be varied depending on the flashiness of the chance-up effect, and interest can be increased.

In this example, the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect include those in which the effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which it is not covered, with the latter being more likely to be executed at a later timing within one variable display period than the former. Specifically, chance-up effects in which the state of the decorative pattern changes are executed later than chance-up effects in which the state of the active display changes (see Figure 8-3). With this configuration, it is possible to execute chance-up effects according to the time when the player's expectations are highest.

In this example, the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect include those in which the effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which it is not covered. In the latter case, one notification image is switched to another and displayed. Specifically, when a chance-up effect that targets a decorative pattern is executed, an image of character A is displayed as shown in Figures 8-17 (13) to (14), and then an image of character A and character B standing side by side is displayed as shown in Figures 8-17 (15) to 8-18 (17). This configuration can enhance the effect of the chance-up effect, which has a high expectation.

Next, a specific example of the chance-up teasing effect (fake) will be described. Figure 8-19 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the chance-up teasing effect (fake). In Figure 8-19, the transition of the effect screen is in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

Figure 8-19 (1) shows the state immediately after the prelude performance in the first half of the Super Reach has started and the chance-up performance targeting the active display has been executed. In this example, as shown in Figure 8-19 (1), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are redisplayed in their initial positions at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5 after the chance-up performance has been executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-19(2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5 so as to pass through the display position of the effect (for example, title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern) that is the target of the chance-up effect. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 8-19(1) and (2), before the dialogue effect starts, the effect display is performed such that the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move so as to pass through the display position (or the position where it is scheduled to be displayed) of the dialogue image 030IWG20. With this configuration, when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner, the player's expectations for the chance-up effect targeting the effect at the displayed position can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

In this example, the effects that are the target of the chance-up effect are displayed in various positions such as the top, bottom, and bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 move to pass through these positions. This configuration allows players to focus on the positions to which the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 move and whether the effect displayed at those positions is the target of the chance-up effect.

In this example, when executing one chance up effect targeting one effect and then executing another chance up effect targeting another effect, the first chance up effect is executed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed before the other chance up effect is executed (see FIG. 8-4). This configuration allows for an interval between the first chance up effect and the other chance up effect, making each stand out, and also ensures a period of time during which the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1) to (2).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 have a lower display priority than the effect images (e.g., active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern, etc.) related to the effects that may be the target of the chance-up effect, and are displayed on a lower layer than them. This configuration allows attention to be drawn to the effects that may be the target of the chance-up effect. Note that, without being limited to this configuration, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 may be displayed on a lower layer than the effect images (e.g., decorative pattern) related to some of the effects that may be the target of the chance-up effect, and displayed on a higher layer than the effect images (e.g., active display and dialogue display) related to the other effects when moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed during the execution of a super reach, and are displayed with a higher display priority than the performance images related to the super reach (for example, the character images related to the outpost performance), but when the chance-up performance is not being performed, they are displayed so as not to obstruct the visibility of at least the central part of the performance image related to the super reach. Specifically, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed so as to move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, rather than moving in the center of the display area, and are not displayed superimposed on the face part, etc., of the character image related to the outpost performance. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 from obstructing the super reach (outpost performance) while still displaying them.

Next, when the chance-up teasing performance (fake) is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (3), a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13, which suggests that a keyhole will appear, is displayed in the center of the display area. At this time, the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 stop moving around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini character A image 030IWC10. In addition, an "!" is displayed next to the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 to indicate the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (3), when the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 is displayed, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 move closer to the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-19 (2) and (3), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 move at a slow speed when the effect to be used has not been specified (or when the chance up teasing effect is not being executed), and at a high speed when it has been specified (or when the chance up teasing effect is being executed). This configuration makes it possible to draw attention to the chance up teasing effect or the effect that is the target of the chance up effect.

Next, an effect display begins in which the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks, but as shown in FIG. 8-19 (4), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11) is not displayed and the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 is erased. At this time, a "?" is displayed next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and mini-character A image 030IWC10 to indicate that the keyhole (suggested) image 030IWG13 has been erased. With this configuration, it becomes clear that the executed chance-up teasing effect is a chance-up teasing effect (fake).

When the chance-up teasing effect (fake) ends, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed again in their initial positions at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5. In this example, they are displayed in the same initial position after the chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1) and after the chance-up teasing effect (fake) is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5). This configuration makes it easy to understand that the chance-up teasing effect (fake) has ended, and conveys the meaning of starting afresh. Also, by displaying them again in their initial positions, it is possible to prevent the amount of data related to effect control from increasing.

In this example, the keyhole (suggestive) image 030IWG13 and the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 can only be displayed once in response to the same effect. For example, if a chance-up teasing effect (or chance-up teasing effect (false)), which teases whether or not a chance-up effect targeting the dialogue display will be executed, has been executed once, the chance-up teasing effect targeting the dialogue display will not be executed again even if the dialogue display is displayed thereafter. This configuration makes it easy to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

The mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 may be configured so that a portion of them extends outside the display area (i.e., a portion of them is not displayed) when they are moved along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. With this configuration, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 can be flexibly moved and displayed in accordance with the performance images related to other performances.

For example, when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, effects that are not subject to the chance-up effect may not be executed. With this configuration, attention can be drawn to the effects that are executed when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving along the edge of the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this example, since the chance up effect can be executed multiple times, it may be possible to make it possible to recognize the number of times it has been executed. For example, when the first chance up effect is executed, an effect image resembling a blue flame may be displayed at the end of the display area of the image display device 5, when the second chance up effect is executed, the effect image may change to green, and when the third chance up effect is executed, the effect image may change to red. With this configuration, it is possible to recognize that a chance up has occurred even after the chance up effect has ended and the effect image has been erased.

Next, we will explain the keyhole (suggested) image and keyhole (real) image for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. Figure 8-20 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of keyhole (real) images for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, in this example, there are multiple types of effects that are the target of the chance-up effect, and the display size of the effect image for each effect is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-20 (1) and (3), the dialogue display has a smaller display size than the title display. In this example, the chance-up effect is executed in a manner in which a keyhole (real) image is displayed in the position where the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the display size of the keyhole (real) image is configured to differ depending on the target effect.

For example, the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the dialogue image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. 8-20(3) has a smaller display size than the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the title image 030IWG21 shown in FIG. 8-20(1). This configuration allows the player to predict the effect that will be the target of the chance-up effect from the position where the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 is displayed, thereby increasing interest, and by displaying the keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 at a display size appropriate for the effect that will be targeted, a natural effect can be achieved.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the keyhole image is materialized, the silhouette of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed at a common size regardless of the type of effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. Then, the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a display size that corresponds to the type of effect that is the target of the chance-up effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to standardize the animation until the keyhole is materialized, and to prevent the amount of data related to effect control from increasing.

As explained above, this feature section 030IW discloses the gaming machine configurations shown in means 1 to means 29 below.

(Means 1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and includes a suggestion performance execution means that suggests that the machine is controlled to the favorable state and is capable of executing multiple types of suggestion performances that differ in expectation level depending on the performance mode (e.g., a performance that displays a title display in a predetermined mode, a performance that displays an active display in a predetermined mode, a dialogue performance that displays a dialogue display in a predetermined mode, a decorative pattern performance that displays a decorative pattern in a predetermined mode, etc.), and a special image display performance execution means that can display a special image (e.g., a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12), and by using the displayed special image, a suggestion performance that is being executed in one performance mode can be changed to a different performance mode. and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect (for example, a chance-up effect in which the display color of the active display is changed from a normal color (white) to blue) that changes the display mode to one with a higher expectation than the normal color (white). The special effect execution means displays a special corresponding image (for example, a keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11) when the suggestion effect is being executed, and executes a special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image (for example, displays a keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH or a decorative pattern, and executes a chance-up effect in a manner in which the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11 and rotates. See Figs. 8-15(9) to (15), Figs. 8-17(9) to 8-18(17), etc.). With such a configuration, when a special effect using a special image is executed, it is possible to enhance the effect of the performance by providing a story related to the special image, and to increase interest.

(Means 2) The special response image is displayed in the approximate center of the performance image related to the suggested performance being executed (for example, see FIG. 8-12 (5) and FIG. 8-14 (7)). At the timing when the special response image is displayed, a special performance targeting a suggested performance other than the suggested performance corresponding to the special response image is not executed (for example, at the timing when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, a chance-up performance targeting the dialogue display is not executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand the suggested performance that is the target of the special performance, and to draw attention to the timing at which the special response image is displayed.

(Means 3) The special response image can be displayed only once in response to the same suggestive effect (for example, if a chance-up teasing effect (or chance-up teasing effect (false)) that teases whether or not a chance-up effect targeting the dialogue display will be executed has been executed once, the chance-up teasing effect targeting the dialogue display will not be executed again even if the dialogue display is displayed thereafter). Such a configuration makes it easy to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect.

(Means 4) When the presentation mode of the suggestive effect changes due to a special effect, the presentation mode after the change differs depending on the timing of the change (for example, the later the chance-up effect is executed, the more likely it is to change to a more advantageous presentation mode. See Figures 8-3 and 8-8). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the special effect will be executed, and to prevent players who had high hopes for the timing of the change from being disappointed.

(Means 5) A display teasing effect execution means is provided that can execute a display teasing effect (e.g., a chance-up teasing effect) that teases whether or not a special corresponding image is to be displayed, and the display teasing effect execution means can execute the display teasing effect in a common manner regardless of where the special corresponding image is displayed (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-14 (2) to (5) and Fig. 8-16 (2) to (5), even if the target effects are different, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is initially displayed in a close-up across the entire screen and then displayed in a common manner that is reduced). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not a special corresponding image is to be displayed, i.e., whether or not a special effect will be executed, and to draw attention to which suggestion effect is the target of the chance-up effect.

(Means 6) When a special image is used in a special effect, it is displayed at a larger display size than the special corresponding image, and then displayed so as to act on the special corresponding image while shrinking (for example, as shown in Figs. 8-15 (9) to (12) and Fig. 8-17 (9) to (12), the key image 030IWG12 is displayed moving from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 at the back, so it is initially displayed at a larger display size than the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11, and then displayed so as to rotate while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller to represent moving away).) With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image acting on the special corresponding image, and the effect of the special effect can be enhanced.

(Means 7) The special effect execution means can execute a special effect multiple times, and can vary the execution time depending on the special effect being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), a chance-up effect that targets a decorative pattern has a longer execution time than a dialogue display or a chance-up effect that targets a dialogue display. With such a configuration, various special effects can be executed at an appropriate execution time, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

(Means 8) When the presentation mode is changed by a special effect, the suggestive effect takes a longer time to execute than when the presentation mode is not changed by the special effect (for example, as shown in Figures 8-4 (A) and (B), the presentation execution time T11 of a dialogue effect whose presentation mode is changed by a chance-up effect is longer than the presentation execution time T12 of a dialogue effect whose presentation mode is not changed by a chance-up effect). With such a configuration, when a special effect is executed, a period for executing the special effect and its corresponding suggestive effect can be secured.

(Means 9) The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a first suggestive performance (e.g., a performance that displays a title display) and a second suggestive performance (e.g., a performance that displays a dialogue display) that is smaller in display size than the first suggestive performance, and the special performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance in a manner in which a special corresponding image is displayed at a position where a performance image related to the suggestive performance is displayed when the suggestive performance is being executed (e.g., a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position where the title image 030IWG21 is displayed or where the dialogue image 030IWG20 is displayed), and When the target suggestive effect is the first suggestive effect, the special corresponding image is displayed in a first display size corresponding to the display size of the first suggestive effect, and when the target suggestive effect is the second suggestive effect, the special corresponding image is displayed in a second display size corresponding to the display size of the second suggestive effect, the second display size being smaller than the first display size (for example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the dialogue image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. 8-20(3) has a smaller display size than the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the title image 030IWG21 shown in FIG. 8-20(1)). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by allowing the player to predict the target suggestive effect from the position where the special corresponding image is displayed, and it is possible to create a natural effect by displaying the special corresponding image in a display size suitable for the target effect.

(Means 10) The suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a specific suggestion performance (e.g., a performance that displays a dialogue display) in which a performance image is displayed at a first position, and a special suggestion performance (e.g., a performance that displays a decorative pattern) in which a performance image is displayed at a second position (e.g., a position closer to the top end of the display area of the image display device 5) that is closer to the edge of the display area of the display means than the first position, and when the specific suggestion performance is executed, the special performance execution means displays a special corresponding image at approximately the center position of the performance image displayed at the first position (e.g., the As shown in FIG. 8-16(7), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at approximately the center of the dialogue image 030IWG20, and when a special suggestion effect is executed, the special response image is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area of the display means from the center position of the effect image displayed in the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-16(7), the keyhole (actual) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area from the center position (the position corresponding to the middle decorative pattern display area 5C) between the left decorative pattern display area 5L and the right decorative pattern display area 5R). With such a configuration, the special response image can be displayed appropriately according to the characteristics of the target suggestion effect.

(Means 11) The special effects include notification effects that notify the player that the presentation mode of the target suggestive effect will change by displaying a special image in a common display position regardless of the position where the special corresponding image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display of "Pending rank up" or "Pattern rank up" are displayed). Such a configuration makes it easier to recognize that the presentation mode of the target suggestive effect will change due to the special effect.

(Means 12) The special response image is not displayed when the presentation mode of the target suggestive effect in the special effect changes (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) to (15) and Fig. 8-17 (13) to Fig. 8-18 (17), the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is not displayed when the active display or decorative pattern mode changes). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the change in presentation mode of the suggestive effect.

(Means 13) The special image display means displays the special image in a manner that moves so as to pass through the display position of the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect during the period before the special effect is executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-12 (1) to (4) and Fig. 8-19 (1) to (2), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 move so as to pass through the position where the dialogue image related to the dialogue effect is displayed (or the position where it is scheduled to be displayed) during the period before the chance-up effect that targets the dialogue effect is executed). With such a configuration, when the special image is displayed in a moving manner, the player's expectations for the execution of a special effect targeting the suggestive effect at the position where the special image is displayed can be increased, and interest can be improved.

(Means 14) When a special image is used, the special image display means moves and displays the special image to the display position of the target suggestive effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-14 (5) and FIG. 8-16 (5), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 move to the display position of the active display AH that is the target of the chance-up effect or to the decorative pattern display area). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special effect and the target suggestive effect.

(Means 15) The special image has a lower display priority than the effect image related to the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14) and FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini character A image 030IWC10 and the mini key image 030IWG10 have a lower display priority than the title display, active display, dialogue display, and decorative pattern, and are displayed in a lower layer than those). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the suggestive effect.

(Means 16) The special effect execution means can execute one special effect targeted at one suggestion effect, and then execute another special effect targeted at another suggestion effect, and the other special effect is executed after the first special effect has been executed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed). With such a configuration, it is possible to set an interval between the one special effect and the other special effect to make them stand out, and also to ensure a period of time during which the special image is displayed in a moving manner.

(Means 17) The speed at which the special image moves is faster when the suggestive effect to be used is specified than when it is not specified (for example, as shown in Figures 8-19 (2) and (3), the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 move at a slow speed when the effect to be used is not specified, and at a high speed when it is specified). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the suggestive effect to be used.

(Means 18) When the special image is displayed and moved, an additional image is added, and the additional image is also displayed and moved, and when a special effect is executed, the additional image operates (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (8), Fig. 8-16 (1) to (8), Fig. 8-19 (2), the mini character A image 030IWC10 is displayed and moved together with the mini key image 030IWG10, and when a chance-up effect is executed, the character A image 030IWC10 throws the key image 030IWG12 into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and to enhance the effect of the special effect.

(Means 19) The special image is displayed in a manner that moves around the additional image, and the movement stops when the special effect is executed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-14 (1) to (6), Fig. 8-16 (1) to (6), and Fig. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 moves in a manner that moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10, and stops its movement when the chance-up effect is executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and to enhance the effect of the special effect.

(Means 20) The special image and additional image are displayed during the execution of a specific effect (e.g., a Super Reach) that suggests that the player will be controlled to an advantageous state, and are displayed with a higher display priority than the effect images related to the specific effect (e.g., as shown in Figures 8-12 (1) to (4), the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed with a higher display priority than the character images related to the outpost effect in the first half of the Super Reach), and are displayed so as not to obstruct the visibility of at least the central part of the effect image related to the specific effect when the specific effect is being executed but the special effect is not being executed (e.g., as shown in Figures 8-12 (1) to (4) and Figure 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed so as to move around the edge of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than moving in the center of the display area, and are not displayed superimposed on the face part, etc., of the character image related to the outpost effect). This configuration makes it possible to display special images and additional images without interfering with specific effects.

(Means 21) A special suggestion effect execution means is provided that can execute a first special suggestion effect (for example, a chance up teasing effect (true)) that suggests that a special effect will be executed and that the special effect will be executed after the effect, and a second special suggestion effect (for example, a chance up teasing effect (false)) that suggests that a special effect will be executed and that the special effect will not be executed after the effect, and the special image is displayed again at the initial position after the second special suggestion effect is executed (for example, the special image is displayed at a common initial position after the chance up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1) and after the chance up teasing effect (false) is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5)). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily understand that the second special suggestion effect has ended, and it is possible to express the meaning of starting afresh. In addition, by displaying it again at the initial position, it is possible to prevent the amount of data related to the effect control from increasing.

(Means 22) The special effect execution means can execute a special effect multiple times, and while executing one special effect targeting one suggestion effect, it does not execute other special effects targeting other suggestion effects (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period has elapsed). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special effect being executed.

(Means 23) The effect images (e.g., decorative patterns) related to at least some of the suggestive effects among the multiple types of suggestive effects have a higher display priority than the special images, even when the special images act on the special corresponding images (see, for example, FIG. 8-15 (9)). With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure visibility of some suggestive effects in any situation. In addition, for effect images related to other suggestive effects (e.g., images that are not information related to the progress of the game, such as dialogue or title displays), a lower display priority than the special images when the special images act on the special corresponding images can be used to realize realistic effects and enhance the presentation effect.

(Means 24) The special effect execution means can display a specific image when executing a special effect (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) and Fig. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display of "Pending rank up" or "Pattern rank up" are displayed together with an effect image covering the performance image related to the outpost performance), and can execute a special effect by a first performance pattern that changes the performance mode of the target suggestive effect when the specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-17 (13) to Fig. 8-18 (17), a pattern in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes while the character and "Pattern rank up" display remain), and a second performance pattern that changes the performance mode of the target suggestive effect at a time other than when the specific image is displayed (for example, as shown in Fig. 8-15 (13) to (15), a pattern in which the appearance of the active display changes after the character and "Pending rank up" display are erased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that the performance mode of the suggestive effect changes by displaying a specific image, and it is possible to execute a special effect suitably by a performance pattern according to the target suggestive effect.

(Means 25) When a special effect is executed by the first effect pattern, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when a special effect is executed by the second effect pattern (for example, a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the active display changes. See FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the expectation can be varied depending on the flashiness of the effect pattern, thereby increasing interest.

(Means 26) As the specific image, it is possible to identify which suggestive performance has changed in its presentation mode, and an image different from the presentation image related to the suggestive performance is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), the text display "Pending Rank Up" or "Pattern Rank Up" is displayed). With such a configuration, it is easy to recognize which suggestive performance has changed in its presentation mode.

(Means 27) The special effect is executed during the execution of a specific effect (e.g., a super reach) that suggests whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the specific image displayed during the execution of the special effect is displayed in a manner that covers the effect image related to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), a character and the text display of "Hold rank up" or "Pattern rank up" are displayed together with an effect image that covers the effect image related to the outpost effect), and the suggestive effect includes a suggestive effect that is covered by a specific image and a suggestive effect that is not covered by a specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), the active display AH is covered, while as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13), the decorative pattern is not covered), and the suggestive effect that is not covered by a specific image has a higher expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state than the suggestive effect that is covered by a specific image (for example, a chance up effect in which the state of the decorative pattern changes has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a chance up effect in which the state of the active display changes. See FIG. 8-7). This configuration allows the level of expectation to vary depending on the extravagance of the special performance, increasing interest.

(Means 28) The special effects of the first presentation pattern are more likely to be executed later in one variable display period than the special effects of the second presentation pattern (for example, a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes is executed later than a chance-up effect in which the appearance of the active display changes. See FIG. 8-3). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute special effects according to the period when the player's expectations are high.

(Means 29) When a special effect is being executed by the first effect pattern, one specific image is switched to another specific image for display (for example, after an image of character A is displayed as shown in Fig. 8-17 (13) to (14), an image of character A and character B standing side by side is displayed as shown in Fig. 8-17 (15) to Fig. 8-18 (17)). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of a highly anticipated special effect.

It is also preferable to provide multiple types of suggestive effects and execute them at various times. For example, a special effect may be executed that has a pseudo consecutive pattern that temporarily stops as a variable display pattern and then variably displays again, and executes a second suggestive effect that uses special images to change the presentation mode at various times in the pseudo consecutive pattern. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention more to the suggestive effects. The detailed control of this point will be explained in more detail below.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
9 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 11). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 9, three locations at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are general winning openings 10 that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 11), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 9). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory count, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 9), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 11).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 11).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 10 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 turning on and off, the movement of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 11. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power supply switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 12 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Then, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include setting a stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S903). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S903; Yes), recovery processing (step S904) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S905). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S903; No), an initialization process (step S906) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S907) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S905, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S905 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S903, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S905, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball striking handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S907, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

If the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S907, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 and the setting change process of step S907 are executed, making it possible to control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S904 and the setting confirmation process of step S905 are executed, making it possible to control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S906 is executed but the setting change state is not controlled, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S904 is executed but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S908). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is generated periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S909), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9010). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 13 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it diagnoses abnormalities in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 13. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 12.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special symbol processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, a determined special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In addition, the special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed in priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 15 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 15 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 15 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 15(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 15(A).

As shown in FIG. 15(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 15(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 16, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the previous setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the second special display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a probability bonus state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the game excessively gambling-oriented. Furthermore, for the time-saving miss, which is assigned a common judgment value for each setting value, the setting is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss can be reduced.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 17 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 17 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 18, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S90175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S90174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S90175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 193SG in the Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, a characteristic feature 193SG in the embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present characteristic feature 193SG) will be described.

The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) including specific performance identification information (e.g., pseudo consecutive patterns) to derive and display a display result, and capable of controlling the gaming machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A specific effect execution means (e.g., a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) in which the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started until the display result is derived and displayed as a variable display, and then the variable display is resumed;
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the specific effect identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the specific performance identification information has temporarily stopped;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestive performance, a performance in which the visibility of performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having an even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figures 19-33 and 19-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying converging lines at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which performance identification information different from the specific performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 19-34 and 19-35, a portion in which an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 to make the left and right decorative patterns invisible),
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance even when the specific performance identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, is capable of continuing to display the effect display for a predetermined period of time after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-44, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestive performance is executed, the converging lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the suggestive effect can heighten the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the execution of the notification effect can heighten the player's sense of excitement at the temporary stop. Furthermore, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that a temporary stop did not occur and easing the player's sense of disappointment at not making a temporary stop, thereby improving interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can variably display a plurality of types of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) to derive and display a display result, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
As a variable display, at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the effect identification information is started to when the display result is derived and displayed, a specific effect (e.g., a pseudo consecutive effect) can be executed by temporarily stopping special identification information (e.g., a pseudo consecutive pattern) different from the effect identification information and then restarting the variable display (e.g., a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 18 );
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the special identification information is temporarily stopped;
A notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a temporary stop notification effect) that notifies that the special identification information has temporarily stopped;
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing, as the suggestive performance, a performance in which the visibility of the performance identification information is once reduced to a first low visibility state by displaying an effect display, and then reduced to a second low visibility state having an even lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as shown in Figures 19-33 and 19-34, a portion in which the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is reduced by displaying convergent lines at a density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is further reduced by displaying convergent lines at a density D2).
The notification performance execution means is capable of executing a performance in which the performance identification information is made invisible as the notification performance (for example, as shown in Figs. 19-34 and 19-35, a part in which the decorative patterns on the left and right sides are made invisible by displaying an effect image for a temporary stop notification in the entire display area of the image display device 5),
The suggestive performance execution means can execute the suggestive performance even when the special identification information does not temporarily stop, and when the temporary stop does not occur, can continue to display the effect display for a predetermined period after the predetermined timing has passed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-44, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestive performance is executed, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the suggestive effect can heighten the player's anticipation of a temporary stop, and the execution of the notification effect can heighten the player's sense of excitement at the temporary stop. Furthermore, if a temporary stop is not made, the effect display continues to be displayed even after the specified timing for the temporary stop, making it easier for the player to recognize that a temporary stop did not occur and easing the player's sense of disappointment at not making a temporary stop, thereby improving interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 3 is
When the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the suggested performance execution means moves the effect display toward a predetermined position where the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) will temporarily stop if it does temporarily stop (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-48 as modified example 193SG-1, a portion where a converging line is moved toward the center of the image display device 5).
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
According to this feature, since the predetermined position can be specified by the effect display, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) has not temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of form 4 is
The effect display has a higher transparency after the specified timing than before the specified timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-33, in the case where the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the convergence lines are displayed with a density of D2 before the timing of switching the display image data, and the convergence lines are displayed with a density of D1 after the timing of switching the display image data, so that the left and right decorative patterns are more visible after the timing of switching the display image data than before the timing of switching the display image data).
4. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
According to this feature, the transparency of the effect display increases after the specified timing when the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) temporarily stops, thereby making the player aware that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) will not temporarily stop, and by drawing attention to the background image which is easily visible through the effect display, the player's disappointment that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) did not temporarily stop can be alleviated.

The gaming machine of form 5 is
The suggestive effect execution means erases the effect display when the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) is temporarily stopped, before any effect identification information (or effect identification information) different from the specific effect identification information is stopped and displayed at the predetermined position where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-44, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the portion where the converging lines are hidden before the decorative pattern of "1", which is a winning combination, or a number other than "1", which is a losing combination, stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C).
5. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the stop of the effect identification information from being mistaken for a temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 6 is
When the notification performance is executed, the temporarily stopped specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-35(G) to FIG. 19-35(H), a crack appears in the pseudo consecutive pattern and the pattern explodes),
A movable body (e.g., a second movable body 193SG033) that can move to a performance position (e.g., a first performance position) that overlaps with at least a part of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) when the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped.
6. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
According to this feature, the movement of the movable body and the transformation of the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) can give an even stronger impression to the player that the ball has been temporarily stopped.

The gaming machine of form 7 is
The movable body is
It is possible to perform a first action (e.g., movement from the retreat position shown in FIG. 19-2 to the first performance position) and a second action (e.g., movement from the retreat position shown in FIG. 19-2 to the second performance position) that has a smaller area of overlap with the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) than the first action,
In the notification performance, the first operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-35(F), the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first performance position during the temporary stop notification performance).
7. The gaming machine according to claim 6,
According to this feature, it is possible to impress upon the player that the reel has been temporarily stopped, while preventing the movable object from making it difficult to see the specific performance identification information (or special identification information).

The gaming machine of form 8 is
The movable body has a light-emitting portion (e.g., a second movable body LED 193SG034) capable of emitting light,
In the first operation, the light-emitting unit emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-2, during the temporary stop notification performance, the second movable body LED 193SG034 emits light in the color of the concentrated line displayed in the temporary stop suggestion performance).
8. The gaming machine according to claim 7,
According to this feature, the light-emitting portion emits light in a manner corresponding to the effect display, thereby improving the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of form 9 is
The first operation of the movable body ends before the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-35(F) and FIG. 19-35(G), the part where the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first performance position to the retreat position before the pseudo consecutive pattern is not displayed on the image display device 5).
9. The gaming machine according to claim 7 or 8,
This feature makes it easier for the player to recognize that the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) is being erased.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
When the notification performance is executed, the temporarily stopped specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-35(G) to FIG. 19-35(H), a crack appears in the pseudo consecutive pattern and the pattern explodes),
A specific performance corresponding display means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of displaying a specific performance corresponding display (for example, a display of “×2”, “×3”, “×4”, etc.) suggesting that the N+1th variable display will be executed after the specific performance identification information is temporarily stopped;
A movable body (e.g., a second movable body 193SG033) that can move to a performance position (e.g., a first performance position) that overlaps with at least a part of the specific performance corresponding display displayed by the specific performance corresponding display means;
Equipped with
10. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 9,
According to this feature, the movement of the movable body can increase attention to the specific performance-related display, thereby improving the performance effect.

The gaming machine of form 11 is
The movable body has a light-emitting portion (e.g., a second movable body LED 193SG034) capable of emitting light,
The light-emitting unit emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect-corresponding display (for example, a part that causes the second movable body LED193SG034 to emit light in blue when displaying "x2" as the first variable display start count notification effect, in green when displaying "x3", and in red when displaying "x4").
11. The gaming machine according to claim 10,
According to this feature, since the light-emitting portion emits light in a manner corresponding to the separately variable display-compatible display, it is possible to draw attention to the specific performance-compatible display, thereby improving the performance effect.

A gaming machine of form 12 is
a special effect execution means (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a special effect (e.g., a portion in which a temporary stop suggestion image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5) in the case where the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop after the suggestion effect is executed;
Equipped with
When the suggestive performance is executed, the performance display of the suggestive performance is displayed in priority to the variable display of the performance identification information during the suggestive performance (for example, a portion in which a pseudo consecutive pattern is displayed moving from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 instead of a normal decorative pattern),
The special effect execution means is capable of executing, as the special effect, an effect relating to a transition between a first effect period up to the predetermined timing when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) moves to a predetermined position and temporarily stops (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-33, a period before the timing of switching display image data in the temporary stop suggestion effect) and a second effect period when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop at the predetermined timing and moves to a position past the predetermined position (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-33, a period after the timing of switching display image data in the temporary stop suggestion effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-33, FIG. 19-35, FIG. 19-44, a portion in the center of the image display device 5 that displays a convergence line while displaying a temporary stop suggestion image),
12. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 11,
This feature makes it easier to control the display in suggestive performances, and prevents the transition to the second performance period from becoming unnatural when the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) is not temporarily stopped due to the special performance.

The gaming machine of form 13 is
The special effect execution means is capable of executing, as the special effect, an effect in which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) temporarily stopped at the predetermined position is superimposed with the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) in a semi-transparent state at a position different from the predetermined position and corresponding to the second effect period (for example, a portion in the center of the image display device 5 that displays a temporary stop suggestion image),
13. The gaming machine according to claim 12,
This feature makes the transition to the second performance period even more natural.

A gaming machine of form 14 is
The image display means is capable of synthesizing and displaying images drawn on a plurality of drawing layers (for example, as shown in FIGS. 19-3 and 19-4, a portion capable of synthesizing and displaying data drawn as image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4 on the image display device 5);
The drawing layer on which the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the effect display of the special effect are drawn is different from the drawing layer on which the effect display of the suggestive effect is drawn (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-3, a portion in which a temporary stop suggestion image is drawn as image data 1, a decorative pattern or a pseudo consecutive pattern is drawn as image data 2, and a convergent line is drawn as image data 4).
14. The gaming machine according to claim 12 or 13,
According to this feature, the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) and the performance display of the special performance can be drawn separately from the performance display of the suggestive performance, thereby increasing the freedom of the suggestive performance, the specific performance identification information (or special identification information), and the special performance.

A gaming machine of form 15 is
When the notification effect is executed, it is possible to execute an effect in which the temporarily stopped specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is transformed, then moved and erased (for example, as shown in Figs. 19-35(G) to 19-35(H), 19-36(I) and 19-36(J), a portion in which a pseudo consecutive pattern is cracked and explodes, and then moved toward the player and then hidden).
The display means further includes a specific effect display means (e.g., a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of displaying a specific effect display (e.g., a display of “×2”, “×3”, “×4”, etc.) that indicates that the N+1th variable display will be executed after the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased,
The specific effect corresponding display means can move and erase the specific effect corresponding display (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-37, a portion that moves and displays displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4" and the like toward the player and then makes them invisible);
The effect identification information in the N+1th variable display is visible during the period from when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) is erased until when the specific effect corresponding display is erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-37(O) , when “x2”, “x3”, “x4”, etc. are displayed on the image display device 5, the decorative patterns on the left and right are visible to the player).
15. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 14,
According to this feature, the presentation effect of the notification presentation and the specific presentation corresponding display can be enhanced, and since the presentation identification information can be seen before the specific presentation corresponding display is erased, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display will resume.

A gaming machine of form 16 is
A notice performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a notice performance that notifies the player of the high possibility of the advantageous state by using the performance identification information,
The advance notice performance execution means restricts the execution of the advance notice performance when the specific performance corresponding display is erased (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-3, in the case where the display of "x2", "x3", "x4" is moved (enlarged) toward the player as the first variable display start count notification performance, the portion restricting the advance notice performance execution).
16. The gaming machine according to claim 15,
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the execution of the advance notice makes it difficult to recognize that the variable display will resume.

The gaming machine of form 17 is
The movement of both the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) and the specific effect corresponding display is toward the player who is playing the game (for example, a portion where a pseudo consecutive pattern explodes and moves toward the player, and a portion where displays such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. move toward the player).
17. The gaming machine according to claim 15 or 16,
This feature can enhance the impression given to the player and improve the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of form 18 is
A special effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a special effect (for example, a portion in which a visibility-impairing image such as an image of an explosion as shown in modified example 193SG-4 is displayed) that makes it difficult to see the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has been temporarily stopped by displaying a special image after the notification effect is executed,
The specific performance execution means makes it possible to view a display corresponding to the resumption of variable display after the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is made difficult to view by the special performance (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-4, a part that executes variable display again after making the visibility-impairing image non-display),
18. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 17,
According to this feature, before a display including performance identification information corresponding to the resumption of variable display is started, a special performance is executed in which the specific performance identification information (or special identification information) is difficult to see, making it easy to understand that the variable display will be resumed.

The gaming machine of form 19 is
An image display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a variable display of the performance identification information and a performance display of each performance;
A light guide plate (e.g., the light guide plate shown in modified example 193SG-4) that is a transparent plate material that is provided on the player side of the image display means and allows the player to see the display of the image display means and that can display the special image by introducing light from the outer peripheral side surface;
Equipped with
The special effect execution means makes the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) displayed on the image display means difficult to see by displaying the special image on the light guide plate during the special effect (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-4, when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped, a visibility-impairing image is displayed on the light guide plate, making the pseudo consecutive patterns displayed on the image display device 5 difficult to see for the player).
20. The gaming machine according to claim 18,
According to this feature, a special image is displayed on the light guide plate, which can enhance the impression on the player, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the special presentation.

The gaming machine of form 20 is
In the case where the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) before the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) after the predetermined timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-33, the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the timing of switching the display image data is V1, but the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols after the timing of switching the display image data is V3).
20. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 19,
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily grasp whether it is before or after the specified timing at which the specific effect identification information (or special identification information) temporarily stops.

The gaming machine of form 21 is
When the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) to the temporary stop predetermined position before the predetermined timing is different from the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position after the predetermined timing when it returns to the predetermined position (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-5, even if the pseudo-consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo-consecutive pattern may temporarily stop after starting to move downward on the image display device 5. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive pattern before the display image data switching timing is different from the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive pattern when it returns to the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5).
21. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein
This feature makes it easier for the player to understand whether the movement is before passing a predetermined position, or a return movement after passing the predetermined position.

The gaming machine of form 22 is
The suggestion effect execution means, when the specific effect identification information (or the special identification information) that has passed the predetermined position returns to the predetermined position, restricts the display of the effect display (for example, as shown in modified example 193SG-5, when the pseudo consecutive pattern returns to the center of the image display device 5 after once passing through the center of the image display device 5, does not display the convergence lines again).
22. The gaming machine according to claim 21 .
This feature makes it even easier to understand that the movement is a return movement after passing by.

The gaming machine of form 23 is
When the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped, the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) before the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) is temporarily stopped is different from the moving speed of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) after the temporary stop (for example, as shown in FIG. 19-34, the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-consecutive patterns is V1, but the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-consecutive patterns is V2).
20. The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 19,
This feature makes it easier for the player to understand whether the movement is before the temporary stop or after the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 24 is
The direction of movement of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) before the temporary stop is different from the direction of movement of the specific performance identification information (or the special identification information) after the temporary stop (for example, as shown in Figures 19-34 and 19-35, the pseudo consecutive symbols before the temporary stop move from above to below, but the pseudo consecutive symbols after the temporary stop move toward the player (nearby side)).
24. The gaming machine according to claim 23,
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier to understand that the movement has occurred after a temporary stop, and it is possible to prevent the misconception of movement.

Figure 19-1 is a configuration diagram showing the control board etc. in this characteristic part 193SG. As shown in Figure 19-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this characteristic part 193SG is provided with a second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body 193SG033 is equipped with a drive motor (not shown), and is operable by the performance control CPU 120 controlling the drive motor. In addition, a second movable body LED 193SG034 for illuminating the second movable body 193SG033 is built into the second movable body 193SG033. The second movable body LED 193SG034 is connected to the lamp control board 14.

As shown in FIG. 19-2(A), when not in operation, the second movable body 193SG033 is located between the image display device 5 and the game board 2, in a position below the image display device 5 (retracted position). Note that in the retracted position, most of the second movable body 193SG033 is hidden by the game board 2, making it difficult for the player to see.

The second movable body 193SG033 in this characteristic part 193SG moves upward from the retreat position shown in FIG. 19-2(A) during the variable display to notify of a temporary stop during the variable display and the first variable display start count notification during the variable display, as well as to notify of a jackpot during the reach effect of the super reach.

When the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect are executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves (operates) from the retracted position to the first performance position which is in front of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 19-2 (B), whereas when the jackpot notification in the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the second movable body 193SG003 moves (operates) from the retracted position to the second performance position which is in front of the image display device 5 and is higher than the first performance position, as shown in FIG. 19-2 (C).

Although not specifically shown, the second movable body 193SG033, which has been moved to the first or second performance position, is configured to return from the first or second performance position to the retreat position again after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 193SG, the second movable body 193SG moves from the retracted position to the first performance position during the temporary stop notification performance, so that a portion of the second movable body 193SG overlaps with the pseudo consecutive symbols when viewed from the front (see FIG. 19-35 (F)). On the other hand, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the second performance position only when a jackpot notification is executed during the super reach performance. In other words, the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 from the retracted position to the first performance position is an operation that overlaps with a larger area of the pseudo consecutive symbols than the movement from the retracted position to the second performance position.

Next, the display control unit 123 in this characteristic unit 193SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores multiple types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a specific image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the performance control CPU 120, and can display a specific performance screen by arranging multiple types of image data and displaying an image on the image display device 5. When preventing a specific image from being displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, there are cases where control is performed so that an image based on the image data of the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen by arranging other image data with a transmittance of 0% in front of the image data of the specific image, and cases where control is performed so that a specific image is not displayed on the performance screen by displaying an image on the image display device 5 that has created display data that does not arrange the image data of the specific image.

As shown in Figs. 19-3(A) to 19-3(D) and Figs. 19-4(A) to 19-4(D), for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging multiple image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, Fig. 19-3 is image data immediately before the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a temporary stop suggestion performance (see Fig. 19-35) in this characteristic section 193SG, and Fig. 19-4 is image data when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 19-3 (A), image data 1 is data that is drawn to display a temporary stop suggestion image suggesting that a pseudo consecutive pattern (the pattern displayed as "NEXT" in this feature section) will stop (temporarily stop) in the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) while the temporary stop suggestion performance is being performed.

The pseudo consecutive symbols in this feature section 193SG are special symbols that are displayed on the image display device 5 as part of the decorative symbols only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect described below, and the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped to execute the re-variable display of the decorative symbols (pseudo consecutive effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive symbols may be symbols that are different from the decorative symbols and that are displayed on the image display device 5 only during the temporary stop suggestion effect or the temporary stop notification effect described below.

Furthermore, in this feature section 193SG, an example has been given of a form in which the pseudo consecutive pattern is a special pattern that is displayed on the image display device 5 as part of a decorative pattern only during a temporary stop suggestion effect or a temporary stop notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive pattern may be a pattern that is displayed as part of a variable display during the period of a temporary stop suggestion effect or a temporary stop notification effect along with a normal decorative pattern.

Furthermore, if the pseudo consecutive symbols are different from the decorative symbols, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed by temporarily stopping the normal decorative symbols (the symbols of the numbers "1" to "9" in this feature section) in the center of the image display device 5, and then changing the temporarily stopped decorative symbols into the pseudo consecutive symbols.

As shown in Figures 19-3 (B) and 19-4 (A), image data 2 is data that is drawn to display the aforementioned pseudo consecutive patterns moving from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 while the temporary stop suggestion performance is being performed, and is also data that is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (patterns from "1" to "9" in this feature unit 193SG) moving from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 in place of the pseudo consecutive patterns immediately after the temporary stop suggestion performance ends without the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stopping.

The image data 2 also displays a swaying display of decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R when a temporary stop suggestion effect is being performed, and also displays a variable display of decorative symbols in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R when a temporary stop suggestion effect is not being performed.

As shown in FIG. 19-4(B), the image data 3 is data that is drawn to display the pseudo consecutive symbols moving downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends.

As shown in Figures 19-3 (C) and 19-4 (C), the image data 4 is data that is drawn to display a converging line from the outer edge of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C).

As shown in Figs. 19-3 and 19-4, display priorities are set for these image data 1 to 4 for displaying the images on the image display device 5. The display priority is set highest for image data 1. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set lowest (image display priorities on the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). In other words, on the image display device 5, the image based on image data 1 is displayed as the topmost image, the image based on image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, the image based on image data 3 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1 and image data 2, and the image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3.

Although not shown, the image data in this characteristic section 193SG includes image data 1 to image data 4 as well as image data 5 that is drawn to display a background image on the image display device 5. The display priority of this image data 5 is set lower than that of image data 4. In other words, in this characteristic section 193SG, of the images displayed on the image display device 5, the background image is displayed as the lowest layer of data.

For this reason, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is being performed, as shown in FIG. 19-3 (D), the image based on image data 2 (a pseudo-repeated pattern moving from the top to the bottom) is displayed in preference to the image based on image data 4 (concentrated lines), and the image based on image data 1 (a temporary stop suggestion image) is displayed in preference to the image based on image data 2 and the image based on image data 4. Immediately after the temporary stop suggestion effect ends without the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stopping, as shown in FIG. 19-4 (D), the image based on image data 3 (a pseudo-repeated pattern moving from the center to the bottom) is displayed in preference to the image based on image data 4 (concentrated lines), and the image based on image data 2 (a decorative pattern moving from the top to the bottom) is displayed in preference to the image based on image data 3 and the image based on image data 4.

The convergent lines in this feature section 193SG are set to a high transmittance (for example, 50%). Therefore, as shown in Figures 19-3(C) and 19-4(D), while the temporary stop suggestion effect is being performed, the player can see the decorative patterns, pseudo consecutive patterns, and temporary stop suggestion images through the convergent lines.

In particular, in this characteristic section 193SG, during the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control section 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 19-3 on the image display device 5 to draw the player's attention to whether the pseudo-repeated symbols will temporarily stop. Also, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control section 123) sets image data in which the pseudo-repeated symbols will temporarily stop, regardless of whether the pseudo-repeated symbols will temporarily stop at the start timing of the variable display, and executes the variable display. Then, at the display image data switching timing (see FIG. 19-33) of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-repeated symbols do not temporarily stop, the effect control CPU 120 (display control section 123) switches the image data displayed on the image display device 5 from the image data in which the pseudo-repeated symbols will temporarily stop (FIG. 19-3) to the image data in which the pseudo-repeated symbols will not temporarily stop (FIG. 19-4) shown in FIG. 19-4.

Figure 19-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 193SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 19-5 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 19-5(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "jackpot", or "minor hit", and the result of the determination of which of several types of jackpot type should be used when the variable display result is a "jackpot", as shown in FIG. 19-5 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19-5(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, the judgment result of the type of jackpot (probable win, non-probable win, or sudden probability), and whether it will be a small win, as the judgment result at the time of winning. In addition, command C6XXH is a variable category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the fluctuation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other".

The commands shown in FIG. 19-5(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 19-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 19-6, in this feature section 193SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 19-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 193SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature section 193SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature part 193SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 193SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 193SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In addition, FIG. 19-7(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 193SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result determination table 2 in this feature section 193SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 19-8 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 193SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 193SG will be explained with reference to FIG. 19-8 (B). In this feature section 193SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "probable jackpot A" may be called a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, and "probable jackpot B" may be called a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game of "Probable jackpot C", a round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to a first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than other jackpot games, making it a high-speed opening jackpot. Note that, during jackpot games of any type, no probable jackpot control or time-saving control is executed.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature section 193SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this feature section 193SG). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when it is decided to have a "high probability jackpot C" or a "small jackpot", the variable display is executed in the same variable pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 19-9), and the chance eye is displayed as a variable display result. Furthermore, since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, it is not possible to distinguish from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 whether it is a "high probability jackpot C" in which high probability control is executed, or a "small jackpot" in which the previous game state continues without high probability control. Therefore, after the end of the high probability jackpot C jackpot game or small jackpot game, it is possible to have the player continue playing while expecting that high probability control is being executed.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 193SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-8(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-8(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 19-9 shows the variation patterns in this characteristic part 193SG. In this characteristic part 193SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of normal reach fluctuation patterns for the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern for the normal reach fluctuation pattern, in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and the super reach fluctuation pattern for the super reach fluctuation pattern. Note that, although this feature section 193SG has two types of normal reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, or there may be only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern. Also, for the super reach fluctuation pattern, multiple super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, ....

The variation patterns in this feature section 193SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in Figure 19-9, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature section 193SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

The normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 193SG includes a variation pattern that does not execute a pseudo consecutive performance in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and then re-variably displayed during the variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special symbol variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 193SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display. In the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special chart variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed three times during the variable display.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing, and therefore in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In other words, for the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern in this feature section 193SG, the more pseudo consecutive effects that are executed during the variable display, the higher the chance of a big win.

In addition, in this characteristic section 193SG, as described below, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of the fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 19-10 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature section 193SG. In this feature section 193SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-10, when the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using this jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach pseudo-consecutive performance 1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach pseudo-consecutive performance 2 jackpot), or PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach pseudo-consecutive performance 3 jackpot). Also, if the variable display result is a sure-win A or sure-win B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 2 jackpots), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 jackpots).

As shown in Figure 19-10, the determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4 are different between jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 30%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 45%. In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when the variable display result is a sure-variable jackpot A or a sure-variable jackpot B, the variable display result is determined to be a Super Reach variable pattern at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-sure-variable jackpot. Furthermore, when paying attention to the number of times that the pseudo consecutive performances are executed, when the variable display result is a sure-variable jackpot A or a sure-variable jackpot B, more pseudo consecutive performances are likely to be executed during the variable display than when the variable display result is a non-sure-variable jackpot. For this reason, this feature section 193SG makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the variable pattern in the variable display and the number of times that the pseudo consecutive performances are executed.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed big win C or a small win, a special win variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special win variation pattern) using the special win variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this feature section 193SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed big win C or a small win, so it is difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed big win C or a small win.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo consecutive performance one miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance two miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach pseudo consecutive performance three miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss) and PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 193SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 193SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 10 is provided with a performance control data holding area 193SG190 as shown in Figure 19-11 (A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 193SG190 shown in Figure 19-11 (A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 193SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 193SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 193SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 193SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 193SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 193SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 193SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 193SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 193SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 193SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 193SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 193SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 193SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 193SG194A as shown in FIG. 19-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 193SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 193SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 193SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands, pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, and reserved memory number notification commands separately for the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A of this characteristic part 193SG, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a display pending flag indicating whether or not the display pattern associated with the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the pre-reading preview setting process (Figure 15) is pending, in other words, indicating that the display pattern is pending because a start opening winning designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and pending memory number notification command have been newly stored due to the occurrence of a new start winning, and a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart pending memory and the second special chart pending memory.

In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A of this feature unit 193SG, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a performance restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory. Note that the performance restriction flag is a flag that indicates that the entry is not subject to the pre-reading preview performance when a start winning occurs at the first start winning port or the second start winning port in the command analysis process (Figure 19-18) but the pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command are not received within the first reserved memory number notification waiting time or the second reserved memory number notification waiting time described below.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later, the hold display flag is set to "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold memory display, and the hold memory display in the normal display mode (e.g., a white circle) is displayed in the first hold memory display area 193SG5D and the second hold memory display area 193SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5. When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is determined, the hold display flag is set to "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode (e.g., a square (◇) or a star (☆)), and the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold memory display area 193SG5D and the second hold memory display area 193SG5U, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is set to notify the possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

When a first winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 193SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning, and when a second winning entry is made to the second winning entry, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 193SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning. When a winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the command from the starting entry designation command to the reserved memory number notification command is sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the command from the starting entry designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 193SG194A shown in FIG. 19-11(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 19-11(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 193SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 13 will be described based on FIG. 19-12. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the on state based on the detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 193SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the on state (step 193SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 193SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting part. If the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; N), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "1" (step 193SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 193SGS101 (step 193SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 193SGS102 (step 193SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step 193SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 193SGS104; Y), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 193SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 193SGS105 (step 193SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section is set to "2" (step 193SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 193SGS103 or step 193SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 193SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 193SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 193SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (step 193SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 193SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 193SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 193SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 193SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of step 193SGS111, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (step 193SGS112). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 193SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 12 after the special pattern process process is completed.

After executing the processing of step 193SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 193SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS115), and then the processing proceeds to step 193SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 193SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 193SGS116), and then the start winning processing is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 19-13 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed in step 193SGS112 of Figure 19-13 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 193SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a determination is made by the normal special symbol process (step S110 of Figure 13, Figure 19-14) described below as to whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" game state. Also, in the variable pattern setting process (step S111 of Figure 13, Figure 19-15) described below, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, apart from these judgments, when the game ball is detected in the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number judgment process of step 193SGS112 to judge whether or not it is judged that the jackpot pattern is to be stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and judge whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that entered the start winning hole is started, that is, before it is decided whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is judged that the special symbol display result will be a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be, and based on this judgment result, the performance control CPU 120 and the like will execute a preview performance such as a pre-reading preview performance, as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 19-13(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag or the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit (step 193SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 193SGS121, the special chart display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 19-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 193SGS109 of FIG. 19-12 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 193SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 193SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 193SGS123 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 193SGS123; N), the special chart display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 19-7 is selected and set (step 193SGS124). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result extracted in step 193SGS109 in FIG. 19-12 is within a predetermined small win determination range (step 193SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within a predetermined small win determination range, that is, if it is determined that a small win will occur in the variable display (step 193SGS125; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small win", is executed (step 193SGS126), a variable pattern determination table for special wins is selected and set (step 193SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS138.

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is not within the predetermined small win judgment range, that is, if the variable display result in the variable display is "miss", the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss" (step 193SGS128), is executed, and it is judged whether the time-saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or not (step 193SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 193SGS129; N), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 193SGS129; Y), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set (step 193SGS131). The miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is a miss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less. In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

In addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, this feature unit 193SG also has miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, which is used when the number of reserved memories is three, and miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, which is used when the number of reserved memories is four, prepared in advance. Of these, of miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, for example, 498 determination values from 0 to 497 (approximately 50%) of the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, 598 determination values from 0 to 597 (approximately 60%) of the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, and in miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, 698 determination values from 0 to 697 (approximately 70%) of the possible range of the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, 100 determination values (approximately 10%) from 898 to 997 are assigned to the range of possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern for the super reach fluctuation pattern.

For this reason, in step 193SGS126, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, and the non-reach and super reach determination will always result in a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so the determination at the time of the initial winning is made using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

Also, if it is determined in step 193SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 193SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 19-13(A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 193SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

The controller 100 also executes the setting to send the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command if it is a non-variable jackpot (step 193SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; Y), the controller 100 selects and sets the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS135), and proceeds to step 193SGS138.

In addition, if the determined jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 193SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is a variable jackpot A or a variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is a sure jackpot A or a sure jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; Y), select and set jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B as the table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS136), and proceed to step 193SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not a variable jackpot A or a variable jackpot B (step 193SGS134b; N), in other words, if the determined jackpot type is a variable jackpot C, select and set the special jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (step 193SGS137) and proceed to step 193SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 193SGS127, step 193SGS130, step 193SGS131, step 193SGS135, step 193SGS136, and step 193SGS137, the variable category according to the range of judgment values including the random number MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern determination tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the variable pattern (step 193SGS138). In this characteristic part 193SG, as shown in FIG. 19-13 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the determination made by the processing of step 193SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 193SGS132), and the winning random number determination process is terminated.

Figure 19-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 14 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 19-14, the CPU 103 first judges whether or not the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" (step 193SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 193SGS141, it is sufficient to read out the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; N), the reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 193SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 193SGS143).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 193SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 193SGS141 (step 193SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 193SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 193SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 193SGS145 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 193SGS141, and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

In addition, the special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 193SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry (step 193SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 193SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS149.

In step 193SGS149, the special pattern display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 19-7 is selected and set as the table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 193SGS150a). In addition, in this step 193SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability of a jackpot is low and the probability flag is off, if the random number value MR1 used to determine the result of the special chart display falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is judged as a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss."

In this way, in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected in step 193SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 193SGS150a, whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) to be a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 193SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 193SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON in the game control flag setting section (step 193SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-8 (A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 193SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot type the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 193SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 193SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a high probability state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 193SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot" corresponding to a non-high probability jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is a "high probability A" corresponding to a high probability jackpot A, it can be set to "1", if it is a "high probability B" corresponding to a high probability jackpot B, it can be set to "2", and if it is a "high probability C" corresponding to a high probability jackpot C, it can be set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 193SGS150a that the result is not a "big win" (step 193SGS150a; N), proceed to S150b and select and set the special chart display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 19-7. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special chart display result of "small win" to determine whether the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c). In step 193SGS150c, if the variable special chart is the first special chart, the determination value corresponding to the first special chart is used to determine whether the special chart display result is a "small win", and if the variable special chart is the second special chart, the determination value corresponding to the second special chart is used to determine whether the special chart display result is a "small win".

If it is determined in step 193SGS150c that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c; Y), the small win flag provided in the game control flag setting section is set to the ON state (step 193SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 193SGS150c that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 193SGS150c; N), proceed to step 193SGS156.

In step 193SGS156, a fixed special symbol is set in response to the pre-determined result of whether to control to a big win game state (whether the big win flag is on or not), whether to control to a small win game state (whether the small win flag is on or not), and further, the determined result of the big win type in the case of a big win game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being "miss", a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be "big win" in step 193SGS150a, if the big win type in step 193SGS154 is "big win A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the big win type is "big win B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C", a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "small jackpot", a special symbol showing the symbol "2", which is a small jackpot symbol, is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 193SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 193SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 193SGS145 (step 193SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 193SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 19-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 14 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 19-15, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is identified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 193SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the identified jackpot type is "Probable variable jackpot C" (step 193SGS163), and if it is not "Probable variable jackpot C", that is, if it is either "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", or "Non-probable variable jackpot" (step 193SGS163; N), jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A or jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the identified jackpot type. Specifically, if the identified jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the identified jackpot type is "Probable variable jackpot A" or "Probable variable jackpot B", jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, if the identified jackpot type is a "Certain jackpot C" (step 193SGS163; Y), a special jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS165).

If the determination in step 193SGS161 indicates that the big win flag is not ON (step 193SGS161; N), it is further determined whether or not the small win flag is ON (step 193SGS166). If the small win flag is ON (step 193SGS166; Y), a special win fluctuation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 193SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 193SGS175.

On the other hand, if the small win flag is off (step 193SGS166; N), the game control flag setting unit determines whether the time-saving flag is on to determine whether the game state is in a special state or a time-saving state and time-saving control is being performed (step 193SGS168). If the time-saving flag is on (step 193SGS168; Y), the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used to determine the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types (step 193SGS169).

On the other hand, when time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not on (step 193SGS168; N), the number of reserved memories of variable special charts is identified, for example, by reading the stored value of a reserved memory number counter for variable special charts provided in the game control counter setting unit, and it is determined whether the identified reserved memory number of variable special charts is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), the loss variable pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 193SGS171).

In addition, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 1 or 2 (step 193SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 3 (step 193SGS172).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 3 (step 193SGS172; Y), the loss variable pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 193SGS173).

Also, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 4 (step 193SGS172; N), the program selects and sets the miss variable pattern determination table C as the table to be used for determining the variable pattern as one of multiple types (step 193SGS174), and proceeds to step 193SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 193SGS164, step 193SGS165, step 193SGS167, step 193SGS169, step 193SGS171, step 193SGS173, and step 193SGS174, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special win fluctuation pattern determination table, or miss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in a fluctuation random number buffer (step 193SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, the process of step 193SGS175 determines the variation pattern, thereby determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to "reach." In other words, the process of step 193SGS170 includes a process for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to a reach state when the variable display result is a "miss."

After the variation pattern is determined in step 193SGS175, settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so that either a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value (step 193SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 193SGS176, settings are made to send various commands for when the special symbol starts to change (step 193SGS177). For example, when the special symbol change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sequentially sends the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variable start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable display start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the processing of step 193SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 193SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game to the stop display of the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result). After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation processing (step 193SGS179), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 193SGS177, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 13 is executed after the variable pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

Figure 19-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 14 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S112 to end the change of the special symbol, and performs control to stop and display the stopped symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step 193SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to send a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 193SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the big win flag is turned on (step 193SGS182), and if the big win flag is turned off (step 193SGS182; N), it is further determined whether the small win flag is turned on (step 193SGS183).

If the small win flag is in the ON state, the performance control board 12 is set to send a win start 5 designation command corresponding to a small win (step 193SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small win display time is set in the small win display time timer (step 193SGS190b). Also, the large prize opening count counter is set to the number of times it has been opened (for example, 2 times) (step 193SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S118) (step 193SGS190d), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is in the ON state (step 193SGS182; Y), if the special probability flag or the time-saving flag is in the ON state, the CPU 103 clears the special probability flag and the time-saving flag to turn them OFF (step 193SGS184), and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (special probability jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (special probability jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (special probability jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-special probability jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 193SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 193SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 193SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 193SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 193SGS189).

On the other hand, if the small win flag is off (step 193SGS183; N), in step 193SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving count counter value is "0". If the time-saving count counter value is "0" (step 193SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 193SGS190; N), that is, if the time-saving counter is in a high base state with remaining time-saving times, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 193SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 193SGS193). If it is not "0" (step 193SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 193SGS193; Y), the process clears the time-saving flag to turn it off in order to end the time-saving control (step 193SGS194), sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 193SGS195), and then proceeds to step 193SGS196.

In step 193SGS196, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern, and then the special pattern stop processing is terminated.

Figure 19-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 14 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 193SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 193SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 193SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 193SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 193SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 193 SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 193 SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; N), it is further determined whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot C (step 193SGS206).

If the stored jackpot type is a special jackpot C (step 193SGS206; Y), the special jackpot flag is set to ON (step 193SGS210), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, if the stored jackpot type is not a special jackpot C, that is, if the jackpot type is a special jackpot A or a special jackpot B (step 193SGS206; N), the special jackpot flag is turned on (step 193SGS207), the time-saving flag is turned on (step 193SGS208), the time-saving count counter is set to "0" (step 193SGS209), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 193SGS205; Y), steps 193SGS211 and 193SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS213.

In step 193SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is sent according to the type of jackpot (step 193SGS214). Then, after sending a game state command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 193SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of special patterns (step 193SGS216).

Next, the operation of the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 19-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S75 of FIG. 14 as the command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 19-18, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether there is a received command from the main board 11 transmitted through the relay board 15 by checking the memory contents of the performance control command receiving buffer (step 193SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 193SGS221; N), it determines whether the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time set (set) in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 described later has elapsed (step 193SGS237), and if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has not elapsed (step 193SGS2375; N), the command analysis processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, if the first or second pending memory number notification command has not been received before the set first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 193 SGS237; Y), the display pending flag of the entry for which the first or second pending memory number notification command has not yet been stored is turned on, and the performance restriction flag of the entry for which storage has not been completed is turned on (step 193 SGS238), and the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 193SGS221 (step 193SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether the received command is a first start port winning designation command (step 193SGS222). Then, if it is a first start port winning designation command (step 193SGS222; Y), the first pending memory number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS223). For example, in the processing of step 193SGS223, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for receiving the first pending memory number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer provided in the performance control timer setting unit 193SG192.

If the received command in step 193SGS222 is not a first start port winning designation command (step 193SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is a second start port winning designation command (step 193SGS224). If it is a second start port winning designation command (step 193SGS224; Y), a second pending memory number notification waiting time is set (step 193SGS225). For example, in the processing of step 193SGS225, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for receiving the second pending memory number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the received command in step 193SGS224 is not a second start port winning designation command (step 193SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a pattern designation command (step 193SGS226). If the received command in step 193SGS226 is not a pattern designation command (step 193SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 193SGS227). If the received command in step 193SGS227 is not a variable category command (step 193SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS228). Then, if it is a first pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS228; Y), the first pending memory number notification waiting time is cleared (step 193SGS229), for example, by initializing the timing operation of the command reception control timer.

If the received command in step 193SGS228 is not the first pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS230). If the received command is the second pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS230; Y), the second pending memory number notification waiting time is cleared, for example, by initializing the timing operation of the command reception control timer (step 193SGS231).

After executing either step 193SGS229 or step 193SGS231, the display pending flag of the stored entry is set to ON, and if there is an unreceived command, the performance restriction flag is set to ON (step 193SGS232).

If the received command in step 193SGS226 is a pattern designation command (step 193SGS226; Y), if the received command in step 193SGS227 is a variable category command (step 193SGS227; Y), or after executing any of the processes in steps 193SGS223, 193SGS225, and 193SGS232, the received command is stored at the top of the free area in the start winning time received command buffer 193SG194A shown in Figure 19-11 (step 193SGS233), and the process returns to step 193SGS221.

In addition, when a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), the pending memory number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. In other words, it is sufficient if the performance control commands received in response to the occurrence of a start winning can be stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A.

If the received command in step 193SGS230 is not the second pending memory number notification command (step 193SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 193SGS234). Then, it is determined whether the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time set in step 193SGS223 or step 193SGS225 has elapsed (step 193SGS235), and if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has not elapsed (step 193SGS235; N), the process returns to step 193SGS221. On the other hand, if the first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed, that is, if the first or second pending memory number notification command has not been received before the set first or second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 193SGS235; Y), the display pending flag of the stored entry is set to ON, and the performance restriction flag of the corresponding entry that has not yet been stored is set to ON (step 193SGS236), and processing returns to step 193SGS221.

Figure 19-19 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of the performance control process. In the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines the presence or absence of a pre-reading preview performance in the pre-reading preview setting process and the performance pattern of the pre-reading preview performance (display pattern of the pending memory display) (S161), and then executes a pending display update process to update the pending memory display in the first pending memory display area 193SG005D and the second pending memory display area 193SG005U of the image display device 5 to a display according to the memory contents of the start winning time reception command buffer 193SG194A (step 193SGS162).

Figure 19-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of Figure 13 as the advance preview setting process. In the advance preview setting process shown in Figure 19-20, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a). Whether or not variable display is being executed can be determined by whether or not the value of the performance control process flag is one of 1 to 3.

If the variable display is not being executed (step 193SGS240a; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241. If the variable display is being executed (step 193SGS240a; Y), the process further determines whether or not the first variable display start count notification effect is being executed (step 193SGS240b). Note that the first variable display start count notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display has been started during one variable display after the re-variable display has been started as a pseudo consecutive effect, as shown in FIG. 19-29 (E), FIG. 19-30 (L), and FIG. 19-31 (S). Also, in step 193SGS240a, whether or not the first variable display start count notification effect is being executed can be determined by referring to the process data of the variable display being executed.

If the first variable display start count notification effect is not being executed (step 193SGS240b; N), the process proceeds to step 193SGS241. If the first variable display start count notification effect is being executed (step 193SGS240b; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS250, where the pending display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the normal display mode, as described below. In other words, the pre-reading preview effect is not executed while the first variable display start count notification effect is being executed.

In step 193SGS241, the performance control CPU 120 checks the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A. Then, it determines whether there is a new command stored at the start winning by checking whether there is an entry with the display pending flag in the on state (set to "1") (step 193SGS242).

If there is no entry with the display pending flag on (step 193SGS242; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If there is an entry with the display pending flag on (step 193SGS242; Y), it is determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the fourth symbol designation or the sixth symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a sure-variable big win C or a small win (step 193SGS243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a sure-variable big win C or a small win (step 193SGS243a; Y), the process proceeds to step 193SGS250, where the reserved display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the normal display mode, as described below. In other words, the pre-reading notice performance is not executed for reserved memories that are sure-variable big win C or a small win.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a sure jackpot C or a small jackpot, it is determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a command indicating a miss (step 193SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (sure jackpot A, sure jackpot B, or non-sure jackpot) (step 193SGS243b; N), the type of jackpot is identified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 193SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the look-ahead preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit, and the type of jackpot identified in step 193SGS244, a look-ahead preview performance judgment table at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead preview performance and the display pattern when the look-ahead preview performance is executed (step 193SGS245).

In step 193SGS245, for example, the determination ratio shown in FIG. 19-21(A) is used to determine whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notification type). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 19-21(A), the determination ratio for whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notification type) is varied depending on the type of jackpot identified in the processing of step 193SGS244.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (preview types) for the preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. When the display pattern for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white rectangle (◇) in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U, and when the display pattern (preview type) for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot other than a sure-win jackpot C, the pre-reading preview performance will never be determined to be non-executed, and the pre-reading preview performance will always be determined to be executed, and either display pattern α or display pattern β will be determined as the display pattern (pre-notice type).

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-21(A), when the jackpot type is "Probable jackpot A," the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "Probable jackpot B" or "Non-probable jackpot," the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which display pattern α is determined.

With this setting, when the variable display result is "jackpot" and display pattern β is executed as the display pattern (notice type), the probability that the jackpot type will be a special jackpot A is higher than when display pattern α is executed, and the player's anticipation of a special jackpot A can be increased.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than a sure-win jackpot C, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is always decided, and either display pattern α, which displays the reserved memory display in a white square (◇), or display pattern β, which displays the reserved memory display in a white star (☆) is executed; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than a sure-win jackpot C, there may be a case where it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, just as when the variable display result is a "miss."

In addition, in step 193SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of an entry whose display pending flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 193SGS243b; Y), the variable category indicated by the variable category designation command of the entry whose display pending flag is on is identified (step 193SGS247). Specifically, if the variable category designation command of the entry is C600H, it is identified as the category of the "non-reach" variable pattern, if it is C601H, it is identified as the category of the "super reach" variable pattern, and if it is C602H, it is identified as the category of the "other" variable pattern which includes normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 193SGS247, a pre-reading preview performance judgment table for misses (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) when the pre-reading preview performance is executed (step 193SGS248).

In step 193SGS248, the display pattern (preview type) and whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance are determined using a determination ratio such as that shown in FIG. 19-21(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 19-21(B), the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (preview type) is varied depending on the category of the variation pattern identified in the processing of step 193SGS247.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types): display pattern α and display pattern β. When the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a specific form of a white square (◇), and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a specific form of a white star (☆). In addition, when the pre-reading notice performance is determined to be non-executed, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a normal form of a circle (○).

As shown in FIG. 19-21 (B), when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other", the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is executed (the rate at which it is determined to be something other than "no preview performance") is set higher than when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach". Also, when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is executed (the rate at which it is determined to be something other than "no preview performance") is set higher than when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other".

When the variable display result is a "miss" and a decision is made to execute a foreseeing preview performance, if the variable category is "other", the probability of display pattern α being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "non-reach". Also, if the variable pattern category is "super reach", the probability of display pattern α being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "miss" and a decision is made to execute a foreseeing preview performance, if the variable pattern category is "other", the probability of display pattern β being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "non-reach", and if the variable pattern category is "super reach", the probability of display pattern β being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "other".

When the variable display result is a "miss," the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined not to be executed is set to the highest, regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach," "other," or "super reach," and the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined to be executed and display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19-21(A), when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the pre-reading preview performance is not determined to be non-executed (no preview performance), and the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined to be executed and display pattern α or display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α or display pattern β is determined in any of the categories of variable patterns when the variable display result is a "miss".

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "Miss (non-reach)", "Miss (super reach)", or "Miss (other)", and it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance, the rate at which display pattern α is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Big hit (probable hit A)", and it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance, the rate at which display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined.

With this setting, when display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview performance, the variable display result is more likely to be a "jackpot" than when display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed); in particular, when display pattern β is executed (displayed), the probability that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "high probability jackpot A" increases, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

After executing step 193SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a decision was made in step 193SGS247 to execute a pre-reading preview performance, i.e., whether or not the display pattern (preview type) was decided to be either display pattern α or display pattern β (step 193SGS249).

After step 193SGS245 is executed or if it is decided to execute a preview performance (step 193SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 193SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (preview type) decided in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is display pattern α showing the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and if the display pattern (preview type) decided in step 193SGS245 or step 193SGS248 is display pattern β showing the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

Also, in step 193SGS249, if it has not been decided that a preview performance will be performed (step 193SGS249; N), the pending display flag for that entry is set to "0", which indicates a white "circle" (step 193SGS250), and then the process proceeds to step 193SGS251.

After executing step 193SGS246 or step 193SGS250, the performance control CPU 120 changes the value of the display pending flag for the entry to "0" (step 193SGS251). After that, the pending display is updated based on the contents of the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A (step 193SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Also, when the variable display is executed and the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A are shifted, the hold display in the first hold memory display area 193SG5D and the second hold memory display area 193SG5U, which are located at the lower position of the image display device 5, is updated according to the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A after the shift.

Specifically, if the number of first special reserved memories is one, one reserved memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this reserved memory display, if the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of first special reserved memories is two, two reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of first special reserved memories is three, three reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of first special reserved memories is four, four reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D in a manner that corresponds to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory.

Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is one, one reserved memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special, if the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of second special reserved memories is two, for example, two reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory, for example, the reserved memory display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of "○" and the reserved memory display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of "☆". Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is three, three reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is four, four reserved memory displays will be displayed, and each reserved memory display will be displayed in the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a manner that corresponds to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory.

And each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), and the reserved memory display also shifts in a predetermined shift direction (towards the center of the screen in this feature part 193SG).

In other words, when the reserved memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described below, which is executed when the variable display starts, and the reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A is shifted, the reserved memory display in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U is also shifted and displayed based on the reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 193SG194A after the shift, and if there is a new reserved memory due to the start winning, the display pattern of that reserved memory is determined and set in the reserved display flag, and it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 193SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 193SG5U in a display mode according to the flag value set in the reserved display flag.

Note that, in this characteristic section 193SG, an example is shown in which the processing of step 193SGS252 is executed in the advance notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing for updating the hold display in the first hold memory display area 193SG5D and the second hold memory display area 193SG5U may be executed separately as a process different from the advance notice setting process (for example, a hold display update process).

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, a decision is made in step 193SGS242 as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory at the start winning, on the condition that there is new storage of a command at the time of the start winning. However, if a start winning in the first start winning port and a start winning in the second start winning port occur simultaneously, and it is determined in step 193SGS242 that there is new storage of a command at the time of the start winning in both the first special chart and the second special chart, in other words, if an entry with the display pending flag in the on state exists in both the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory, then both entries are subject to the decision as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance. If the pending memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special chart is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special chart is newly stored are both targets for deciding whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading preview performance, the pre-reading preview performance may be executed simultaneously in both the pending display of the pending memory of the first special chart and the pending display of the second special chart.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, as described above, when a start winning entry into the first start winning port and a start winning entry into the second start winning port occur simultaneously, both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning entry in the first special chart is newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning entry in the second special chart is newly stored are subject to the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in such a case, it may be decided to execute or not execute only one of the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart and the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart is given priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, and when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart is given priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, and when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart.

Figure 19-22 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 18. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on or not (step 193SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 193SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 193SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 193SGS271 (step 193SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 193SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 193SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 193SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 193SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 193SGS272 or step 193SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 193SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) and the variation pattern (step 193SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 193SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot B, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the small win. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned as even numbers as the stop patterns. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small jackpot, the stop patterns are determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the probability jackpot C. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, the stop patterns are determined to be decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned, and are combinations other than the above-mentioned chance numbers (miss patterns). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is a first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display fluctuation pattern is a reach fluctuation pattern, a reach miss combination (miss pattern) in which the left and right patterns are the same but the center pattern is different is determined as the stopping pattern.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether or not the corresponding variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a pseudo consecutive performance during variable display (step 193SGS277). If the corresponding variation pattern is a variation pattern for executing a pseudo consecutive performance during variable display (step 193SGS277; Y), a preview performance decision process for variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance (for when pseudo consecutive performance is not executed) is executed to determine whether or not a preview performance is executed during variable display and the preview performance to be executed (step 193SGS278).

After executing step 193SGS278, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether the change pattern is a super reach change pattern or not. If the change pattern is a super reach change pattern (193SGS279; Y), it decides whether to execute a special temporary stop notification performance instead of a temporary stop notification performance based on the variable display result (step 193SGS280). The temporary stop notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped as a pseudo consecutive effect, and the special temporary stop notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped as a pseudo consecutive effect, and updating the background image displayed on image display device 5 to a background image according to the number of temporary stops (a first special background image if the temporary stop is the first time, a second special background image if the temporary stop is the second time, and a third special background image if the temporary stop is the third time).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification performance (step 193SGS281). If it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification performance (step 193SGS281; Y), it selects a process table corresponding to the execution of the special temporary stop notification performance and the fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS282).

If the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (193SGS279; N) or if it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (193SGS281; N), the temporary stop notification effect period is determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds based on the variable display result (step 193SGS283). Then, a process table is selected according to the temporary stop notification effect period and fluctuation pattern determined in step 193SGS283, and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (step 193SGS284).

In addition, if the relevant variable pattern is one in which pseudo consecutive performance is not executed during variable display (step 193SGS277; N), a preview performance decision process for variable display that does not execute pseudo consecutive performance is executed to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance during variable display and the preview performance to be executed (step 193SGS285). After determining whether or not to execute a preview performance and the preview performance to be executed in step 193SGS285, a process table corresponding to the variable pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 193SGS287 (193SGS286).

In step 193SGS287, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the process table selected in either 193SGS282, 193SGS284, or 193SGS286 (step 193SGS287).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 193SGS288). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 193SGS289). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 193SGS290). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display in progress performance process (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 193SGS291).

The performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 each time it executes the performance process during variable display, and determines whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, it controls the performance device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, it switches to the next process data, starts the next process timer anew, and controls the performance device according to the next process data, thereby executing the variable display of the decorative pattern. Note that if the performance control CPU 120 has decided to execute a preview performance in the variable display start setting process, it is capable of executing a preview performance execution process to execute a preview performance within the variable display performance process.

Next, the flow of the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 19-23 (A), when the variation pattern is a normal reach variation pattern that executes a pseudo consecutive performance once during the variable display, a temporary stop suggestion performance is executed first, which suggests a temporary stop of the decorative symbols after the reach is reached. Note that the temporary stop suggestion performance in this characteristic part 193SG is a performance in which the decorative symbols temporarily stop in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and then the pseudo consecutive symbols are variably displayed at a slower speed than normal in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. Note that the length of the temporary stop suggestion performance period differs depending on the length of the temporary stop notification performance period determined in step 193SG283 of the variable display start setting process.

If the temporary stop notification performance period is set to the temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion performance ends when the first temporary stop timing A occurs, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop notification performance is performed for 2 seconds. Also, if the temporary stop notification performance period is set to the temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the temporary stop suggestion performance ends when the first temporary stop timing B occurs, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop notification performance is performed for 1.5 seconds. Note that, as shown in FIG. 19-23(A), the temporary stop notification performance period A and the temporary stop notification performance period B are set to end at the same timing, that is, the temporary stop notification performance is set to end at a specific timing regardless of whether the performance period is set to 1.5 seconds or 2 seconds.

Then, when the temporary stop notification effect ends, the re-variable display notification effect is executed. The re-variable display notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that a re-variable display of the decorative pattern is being executed by outputting a re-variable display notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R, and displaying an image of a character according to the number of re-variable display times on the image display device 5 (an image of character A if the re-variable display time is the first time, an image of character B if the re-variable display time is the second time, and an image of character C if the re-variable display time is the third time).

The first re-variable display is executed during the re-variable display notification performance. When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the first re-variable display start count notification performance is executed from the end timing of the re-variable display notification performance. The first re-variable display start count notification performance is a performance in which the image display device 5 displays the re-variable display count of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display count, and an effect image of a color according to the re-variable display count is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. In other words, the first re-variable display start count notification performance corresponding to the first re-variable display is a performance in which "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5 and a blue effect image is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5, the first re-variable display start count notification performance corresponding to the second re-variable display is a performance in which "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 and a green effect image is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5, and the first re-variable display start count notification performance corresponding to the third re-variable display is a performance in which "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5 and a red effect image is displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5.

When the first variable display start count notification effect ends, the second variable display start count notification effect is executed from the end timing of the first variable display start count notification effect. The second variable display start count notification effect is an effect in which the variable display count of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display count is displayed on the image display device 5 in a smaller size than the first variable display start count notification effect.

After the second variable display start count notification effect ends, the game will enter a reach state again and a temporary stop suggestion effect will be executed. At this time, the pseudo consecutive symbols will not temporarily stop and a normal reach reach effect will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 19-23(B), when it is determined that the special temporary stop notification effect will not be executed and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice during a variable display, in the same way as when the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 19-23(A) is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed once during a variable display, after a reach is reached, a temporary stop suggestion effect, a temporary stop and re-variable display of the first pseudo consecutive pattern, a temporary stop notification effect, a re-variable display notification effect, a first variable display start count notification effect, a second variable display start count notification effect, and a first temporary stop and re-variable display are executed, and then a reach is reached again and a second temporary stop and re-variable display of the pseudo consecutive pattern, a temporary stop notification effect, a re-variable display notification effect, a first variable display start count notification effect, and a second variable display start count notification effect are executed. Then, after the second second variable display start count notification effect is finished, a reach is reached again and a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed. At this time, the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop and the Super Reach reach effect is executed.

If the first temporary stop notification performance is executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the second temporary stop notification performance will also be executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), and if the first temporary stop notification performance is executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the second temporary stop notification performance will also be executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds).

As described above, in the second re-variable display notification performance, an image of a character (character B) different from that in the first re-variable display performance is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the second first variable display start count notification performance and the second variable display start count notification performance, unlike the first first variable display start count notification performance and the second variable display start count notification performance, "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 (the second second variable display start count notification performance displays "x3" of a smaller size than that of the second first variable display start count notification performance).

As shown in FIG. 19-25, when it is determined that the special temporary stop notification effect will not be executed and the change pattern is a super reach change pattern in which the pseudo consecutive effects are executed three times during the variable display, the change pattern shown in FIG. 19-23 (B) is the same as when the change pattern is a super reach change pattern in which the pseudo consecutive effects are executed twice during the variable display, after the reach is reached, a temporary stop suggestion effect, temporary stop and re-variable display of the pseudo consecutive symbols up to the second time, a temporary stop notification effect, a re-variable display notification effect, a first variable display start count notification effect, and a second variable display start count notification effect are executed. Then, after the second second variable display start count notification effect is finished, the reach is reached again, and the third temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols, a temporary stop notification effect, a re-variable display notification effect, a first variable display start count notification effect, and a second variable display start count notification effect are executed, and further a reach effect of the super reach is executed.

If the first and second temporary stop notification performances are executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), the third temporary stop notification performance will also be executed during temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds), and if the first and second temporary stop notification performances are executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds), the third temporary stop notification performance will also be executed during temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds).

As described above, in the third re-variable display notification performance, an image of a character (character C) different from that in the first and second re-variable display performances is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the third first variable display start count notification performance and the second variable display start count notification performance, "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5, different from the second first variable display start count notification performance and the second variable display start count notification performance (the third second variable display start count notification performance displays "x4" of a smaller size than that in the third first variable display start count notification performance).

As shown in FIG. 19-26, if it has been decided to execute a special temporary stop notification effect and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo consecutive effect is executed twice during the variable display, the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed first.

In addition, in this variable display, when the first temporary stop timing A is reached, the temporary stop notification effect ends, the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, and the special temporary stop notification effect is executed for two seconds. In other words, in a variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, unlike a variable display in which the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (the temporary stop notification effect is executed), the temporary stop suggestion effect period and the special temporary stop notification effect period are constant.

After the special temporary stop notification effect is finished, the first re-variable display of the decorative pattern is executed without executing the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect. After a while, the second variable display start count notification effect is executed. In other words, in the variable display, after the first special temporary stop notification effect is executed, the image of the character (character A) is not displayed as the first re-variable display notification effect, and the image display device 5 does not display "x2" as the first variable display start count notification effect, but only the image display device 5 displays "x2" smaller than the first variable display start count notification effect as the second variable display start count notification effect.

Then, after the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern and re-variable display, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start count notification effect are executed, the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern and re-variable display, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the second variable display start count notification effect are executed, and then the reach effect of the super reach is executed.

In addition, as the second variable display start count notification effect, a "x3" smaller in size than the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5, as in FIG. 19-23 (B).

As shown in Figure 19-27, when it has been decided to execute the special temporary stop notification effect and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo consecutive effects are executed three times during the variable display, the temporary stop suggestion effect, the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols up to the second time, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the notification effect of the number of times the second variable display has started are executed as in Figure 19-26, and then the temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative symbols for the third time, the special temporary stop notification effect, and the notification effect of the number of times the second variable display has started are executed, and then the reach effect of the super reach is executed.

As for the third second variable display start count notification effect, the image display device 5 displays "x4" in a smaller size than the first variable display start count notification effect, as in FIG. 19-23 (B).

As mentioned above in part, as shown in FIG. 19-28, the temporary stop notification effect in this feature part 193SG is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R from the timing when the decorative symbols have temporarily stopped as a pseudo consecutive effect, and is an effect that is executed for 2 seconds or 1.5 seconds.

The special temporary stop notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that the decorative symbol has temporarily stopped by outputting a temporary stop notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R from the moment the decorative symbol temporarily stops as a pseudo consecutive effect, and updating the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to a background image according to the number of temporary stops (the first special background image if the temporary stop is the first, the second special background image if the second, and the third special background image if the third). Note that the special background image displayed on the image display device 5 as the special temporary stop notification effect is an image that is displayed until the next special background image is updated or the variable display ends, while the output period of the temporary stop notification sound (special temporary stop notification effect period) is 2 seconds, the same as part of the temporary stop notification effect.

The re-variable display notification effect is an effect that notifies the player that a re-variable display of a decorative pattern is being executed by outputting a re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R and displaying an image of a character according to the number of times of re-variable display on the image display device 5 (an image of character A if the number of times of re-variable display is the first, an image of character B if the number of times of re-variable display is the second, and an image of character C if the number of times of re-variable display is the third). The performance period of the re-variable display notification effect (the display period of the image of the character on the image display device 5 and the output period of the re-variable display notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R) is 3 seconds regardless of the number of times of execution of the re-variable display. As mentioned above, in a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance, the higher the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is executed (the number of times the temporary stop and re-variable display are executed), the higher the expectation of a big win is set for the re-variable display notification effect, so that the expectation of a big win is set to be highest when the image of character C is finally displayed, and the lowest when the image of character A is finally displayed.

The first variable display start count notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of decorative patterns including the re-variable display has started during one variable display after the re-variable display has started as a pseudo consecutive effect, and is an effect that displays the number of times that the variable display of decorative patterns including these re-variable displays has started on the image display device 5 (the first first variable display start count notification effect is "x2", the second first variable display start count notification effect is "x3", and the third first variable display start count notification effect is "x4"). The duration of these first variable display start count notification effects is 1 second regardless of the number of times that the variable display of decorative patterns including the re-variable display has started.

The second variable display start count notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of times that the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display has started during one variable display after the first variable display start count notification effect, and is an effect that displays the number of times that the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display has started on the image display device 5 ("x2" for the first first variable display start count notification effect, "x3" for the second first variable display start count notification effect, and "x4" for the third first variable display start count notification effect) in a smaller size than the first variable display start count notification effect. Note that the duration of these second variable display start count notification effects is 2 seconds regardless of the number of times the variable display of the decorative pattern including the re-variable display has started.

Figure 19-29 (A) is a flowchart showing the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo consecutive performance is executed) of the variable display start setting process in Figure 19-22. In the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo consecutive performance is executed), the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS301). Then, a random number value for preview performance execution determination is extracted, and using the random number value and a preview performance determination table (not shown), it determines whether or not to execute a preview performance in the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance, and which preview performance to execute (step 193SGS302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-29 (B), when the variable display result is a jackpot, a decision is made to not execute the preview performance at a rate of 5%, to execute the cut-in preview performance at a rate of 20%, to execute the group preview performance at a rate of 45%, and to execute both the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance at a rate of 30%.

Note that a cut-in preview effect is an effect in which a cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 19-29 (F), and a group preview effect is an effect in which a large number of characters are displayed crossing the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 19-29 (G).

If the variable display result is a miss and a super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach miss), the preview performance is not executed at a rate of 40%, the cut-in preview performance is executed at a rate of 30%, the group preview performance is executed at a rate of 25%, and the cut-in preview performance and group preview performance are executed at a rate of 5%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and a normal reach fluctuation pattern (normal reach miss), the preview performance is not executed at a rate of 90%, the cut-in preview performance is executed at a rate of 8%, the group preview performance is executed at a rate of 2%, and the cut-in preview performance and group preview performance are executed at a rate of 0%.

In other words, in the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance in this characteristic part 193SG, the lowest jackpot expectation is set when neither the cut-in notice performance nor the group notice performance is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher when only the cut-in notice performance is executed as the notice performance than when neither the cut-in notice performance nor the group notice performance is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher when only the group notice performance is executed as the notice performance than when only the cut-in notice performance is executed, and the highest jackpot expectation is set when both the cut-in notice performance and the group notice performance are executed as notice performances (jackpot expectation for notice performance in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance: cut-in notice performance + group notice performance > group notice performance > cut-in performance > not executed).

After executing step 193SGS302, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a preview performance (deciding to execute at least one of a cut-in preview performance and a group preview performance) (step 193SGS303). If it has not decided to execute any preview performance (step 193SGS303; N), it ends the preview performance decision process (for executing pseudo consecutive performances), and if it has decided to execute any preview performance (step 193SGS303; Y), it stores the decided preview performance and sets a preview performance start waiting timer to end the preview performance decision process (for executing pseudo consecutive performances) (steps 193SGS304, step 193SGS305).

As shown in FIG. 19-32, the execution period of these preview effects overlaps with the re-variable display notification performance period and the first variable display start count notification performance period. In particular, if it has been decided that both the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance will be executed as preview effects, the cut-in preview performance and the group preview performance will be executed in an overlapping manner during the re-variable display notification performance period and the first variable display start count notification performance period.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, if it is decided in the preview performance decision process (for when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed) that any preview performance will be executed, the same preview performance will be executed during all re-variable display notification performance periods (see Figures 19-29 to 19-31).

Figure 19-30 (A) is a flowchart showing the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo consecutive performance is not executed) of the variable display start setting process in Figure 19-22. In the preview performance determination process (for when pseudo consecutive performance is not executed), the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 193SGS311). Then, a random number value for preview performance execution determination is extracted, and using the random number value and a preview performance determination table (not shown), it determines whether or not to execute a preview performance in the variable display where pseudo consecutive performance is not executed, and which preview performance to execute (step 193SGS312).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-30 (B), when the variable display result is a jackpot, a decision is made to not execute the preview effect 5% of the time, to execute the cut-in preview effect 30% of the time, and to execute the group preview effect 65% of the time.

If the variable display result is a miss and a super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach miss), the preview performance is not executed with a probability of 40%, the cut-in preview performance is executed with a probability of 35%, and the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 25%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and a normal reach fluctuation pattern (normal reach miss), the preview performance is not executed with a probability of 90%, the cut-in preview performance is executed with a probability of 8%, and the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 2%.

In other words, in the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed in this characteristic part 193SG, the lowest jackpot expectation is set when neither the cut-in preview performance nor the group preview performance is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher when only the cut-in preview performance is executed as the preview performance than when neither the cut-in preview performance nor the group preview performance is executed, and the jackpot expectation is set higher when only the group preview performance is executed as the preview performance than when only the cut-in preview performance is executed (jackpot expectation for preview performance in variable display that executes pseudo consecutive performance: group preview performance > cut-in performance > not executed).

After executing step 193SGS312, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a preview performance (step 193SGS313). If it has not been decided to execute a preview performance (step 193SGS313; N), the preview performance decision process (for when pseudo consecutive performances are not executed) is terminated. If it has been decided to execute a preview performance (step 193SGS313; Y), the decided preview performance is stored, a preview performance start waiting timer is set, and the preview performance decision process (for when pseudo consecutive performances are not executed) is terminated (steps 193SGS314, step 193SGS315).

When a preview performance is executed in the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive performance is not executed, the preview performance may be executed at any time during the period from the start timing of the variable display to the reach timing.

Figure 19-31 (A) is a diagram showing the decision ratio when the performance control CPU 120 decides whether or not to execute a special temporary stop notification effect in step 193SG280 in Figure 19-22. In step 193SG280 in Figure 19-22, if the variable display result is a jackpot (super reach jackpot), the performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (execution of the temporary stop notification effect) with a probability of 20%, and decides to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (not to execute the temporary stop notification effect) with a probability of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss (super reach miss), the performance control CPU 120 decides not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (execution of the temporary stop notification effect) with a probability of 80%, and decides to execute the special temporary stop notification effect (not to execute the temporary stop notification effect) with a probability of 20%.

In other words, in this feature section 193SG, when a special temporary stop notification effect is executed in a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance (when a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern and a special background image is displayed on image display device 5), the expectation of a jackpot is set higher than when a special temporary stop notification effect is not executed (when only a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in response to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern; when a temporary stop notification effect is executed) (expectation of a jackpot in a variable display that executes a pseudo consecutive performance: execution of special temporary stop notification effect > non-execution of special temporary stop notification effect).

Also, as mentioned above, when focusing on the case where the special temporary stop notification effect is executed, if the pseudo consecutive effect is executed once during the variable display, only the first special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern, but if the pseudo consecutive effect is executed twice during the variable display, after the first special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern, the second special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the first special background image in response to the second temporary stop of the decorative pattern (the first special background image is updated to the second special background image), and the third special background image is displayed on the image display device 5 in place of the second special background image in response to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern (the second special background image is updated to the third special background image).

In other words, for variable displays that perform pseudo consecutive performances, the more pseudo consecutive performances that are performed during the variable display, the higher the chance of a jackpot is set, so that the highest chance of a jackpot is set when the background image that is finally displayed on the image display device 5 is the third special background image, and the lowest chance of a jackpot is set when the background image that is finally displayed on the image display device 5 is the first special background image (jackpot chance for special background images that are finally displayed on the image display device 5 in variable displays that perform pseudo consecutive performances: third special background image > second special background image > first special background image).

Figure 19-31 (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio when the performance control CPU 120 determines the tentative stop notification presentation period based on the variable display result in step 193SG283 in Figure 19-22. In step 193SG283 in Figure 19-22, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines the tentative stop notification presentation period to be tentative stop notification presentation period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 60% and to be tentative stop notification presentation period B (1.5 seconds) at a rate of 40%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the performance control CPU 120 determines the tentative stop notification presentation period to be tentative stop notification presentation period A (2 seconds) at a rate of 40% and to be tentative stop notification presentation period B (1.5 seconds) at a rate of 60%. In other words, when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance, if the performance period of the temporary stop notification effect is set to 2 seconds, the expectation of a jackpot is set higher than when the performance period of the temporary stop notification effect is set to 1.5 seconds (expectation of a jackpot for the performance period of the temporary stop notification effect when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed in the variable display that executes the pseudo consecutive performance: temporary stop notification performance period A (2 seconds) > temporary stop notification performance period B (1.5 seconds)).

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, an example is given of a form in which the temporary stop notification display period can be determined from 2 seconds and 1.5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the temporary stop notification display period may be uniquely determined to be one period, or may be determined from three or more periods.

In addition, this feature section 193SG exemplifies a form in which a longer temporary stop notification display period has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a shorter temporary stop notification display period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a shorter temporary stop notification display period may have a higher expectation of a jackpot than a longer temporary stop notification display period.

Next, the output mode of the sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R during the variable display will be described. As shown in FIG. 19-32, first, the speakers 8L, 8R are capable of outputting background music (BGM) based on the progress of the variable display. The BGM is output during the variable display except during the re-variable display notification performance period. In addition, the speakers 8L, 8R are capable of outputting a temporary stop suggestion sound, a temporary stop notification sound, a re-variable display notification sound, and a first variable display start count notification sound. Of these, the temporary stop suggestion sound is output only during the temporary stop suggestion performance period, the temporary stop notification sound is output only during the temporary stop notification performance period, the re-variable display notification sound is output only during the re-variable display notification performance period, and the first variable display start count notification sound is output only during the first variable display start count notification performance period.

Furthermore, speakers 8L and 8R are capable of outputting a cut-in preview performance sound and a group preview performance sound. Of these, the cut-in preview performance sound is output only during the cut-in preview performance execution period when it has been decided that a cut-in preview performance will be executed, and the group preview performance sound is output only during the group preview performance execution period when it has been decided that a group preview performance will be executed.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 19-32, during the variable display in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, the output of BGM from the speakers 8L, 8R is restricted during the variable display notification performance period in which the variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, while the output of BGM from the speakers 8L, 8R is not restricted during the variable display except for the variable display notification performance period. Furthermore, during the tentative stop suggestion performance period, two types of sounds, BGM and the tentative stop suggestion sound, are output from the speakers 8L, 8R, while during the first variable display start count notification performance period, up to four types of sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R, including the first variable display start count notification sound as well as BGM, a cut-in advance performance sound, and a group advance performance sound.

Next, the display mode of each image on the image display device 5 during the tentative stop suggestion performance period will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 19-33, during the tentative stop suggestion performance period when the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, the image display device 5 displays the moving pseudo consecutive symbols from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing them with image data 2. The moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the tentative stop suggestion performance period to the display image data switching timing. Note that the pseudo consecutive symbols are not drawn as image data 2 from the display image data switching timing onwards; in other words, the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden as image data 2 from the display image data switching timing onwards.

In addition, halfway through the pseudo consecutive pattern moving at speed V1, a tentative stop suggestion image is displayed on the image display device 5 by drawing with image data 1. The tentative stop suggestion image is displayed from halfway through the pseudo consecutive pattern moving at speed V1 until the display image data switching timing period, but is not displayed (hidden) during other periods.

In addition, immediately before the timing of switching the display image data, the pseudo consecutive patterns begin to be displayed in the center of the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3. The pseudo consecutive patterns drawn by the image data 3 do not move (speed 0) until the timing of switching the display image data, but from the timing of switching the display image data, they move downward from the center of the image display device 5 at a speed V3 that is faster than the aforementioned speed V1. The pseudo consecutive patterns drawn by the image data 3 move out of the display area of the image display device 5, making them invisible.

Furthermore, from the timing of switching the display image data, the decorative symbols are moved (variable display) from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbols is performed from the timing of switching the display image data at a speed V2 (speed: V3>V2>V1) that is faster than speed V1 and slower than speed V3. The moving display (variable display) of the decorative symbols continues until the start of the reach performance.

Then, from the timing when the temporary stop suggestion effect starts, the image display device 5 displays the converging lines by drawing the image data 4. The converging lines are displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period of time from the timing when the temporary stop suggestion effect starts, and then at D2, which is denser than D1. In other words, the number of converging lines displayed increases as a certain period of time passes from the start of display on the image display device 5. Then, from the timing when the display image data is switched, the converging lines are displayed again at a density of D1, and then are hidden.

Therefore, during the period of the temporary stop suggestion performance in which the pseudo consecutive patterns are not stopped, from the start of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the time when the display image data is switched, the converging lines are displayed at a density of D1, making the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) lower than the state before the temporary stop suggestion performance was performed (visibility: high) (visibility: medium). Furthermore, the density of the converging lines changes from D1 to D2, making the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) even lower (visibility: low).

In addition, from the time when the display image data is switched to the time when the display of the converging lines ends, the visibility of the decorative patterns on the left and right is higher (visibility: medium) than when the converging lines are displayed at density D2 because the converging lines are displayed at density D1. Then, after the time when the display of the converging lines ends, the display of the converging lines ends (they are not displayed), so the visibility of the decorative patterns on the left and right is the highest (visibility: high).

As shown in FIG. 19-34, during the tentative stop indication period when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the image display device 5 executes the moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2. The moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols is executed at a speed V1 from the start timing of the tentative stop indication period to the end timing of the tentative stop indication period (the tentative stop timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols). The period required from the start timing of the variable display to the tentative stop timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols is the same as the period required from the start timing of the variable display to the display image data switching timing when the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 19-33. Furthermore, after the tentative stop indication is executed, the tentative stop notification is executed, but during the tentative stop notification execution period, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped (at a speed V0) in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C and then hidden.

In addition, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays converging lines by drawing the image data 4. The density (display density) of the converging lines is displayed in D2 from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect to the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect (the temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive patterns), but is hidden from the end timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

Then, from the timing when the temporary stop suggestion effect starts, the image display device 5 displays the converging lines by drawing the image data 4. The converging lines are displayed at a density (display density) of D1 for a certain period of time from the timing when the temporary stop suggestion effect starts, and then are displayed at D2, which is denser than D1. In other words, the number of converging lines displayed increases as a certain period of time passes from the start of display on the image display device 5. The converging lines are then hidden from the timing when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped.

Therefore, during the temporary stop suggestion performance period when the pseudo consecutive patterns are not stopped, from the start timing of the temporary stop suggestion performance to the timing of the display image data change, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is lower (visibility: medium) than the state before the temporary stop suggestion performance was executed (visibility: high) because the concentration lines are displayed at density D1. Furthermore, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns (decorative patterns displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) is further lower (visibility: low) because the density of the concentration lines changes from D1 to D2. Also, from the temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive patterns, the display of the concentration lines ends (is not displayed), so the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is the highest (visibility: high).

Although not shown in FIG. 19-34, after the end of the temporary stop suggestion display, that is, during the temporary stop notification display period, the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, and an effect image for the temporary stop notification of the decorative symbols is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols by drawing image data 1. The effect image for the temporary stop notification of the decorative symbols is then switched to being displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 19-35). The effect image for the temporary stop notification in this feature section 193SG is an image whose transparency is set to 0%.

In other words, during the temporary stop notification performance period, the visibility of the left and right decorative patterns is higher than during the temporary stop suggestion performance execution period (visibility: medium) because the convergence lines are temporarily hidden, but the left and right decorative patterns become invisible due to the display of the temporary stop notification effect image over the entire display area of the image display device 5 (visibility: invisible).

However, from the timing when the display of the provisionally stopped pseudo consecutive symbols in the image data 2 ends, the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed moving toward the player (the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1) at a speed V2 by drawing the image data 2. At this time, the pseudo consecutive symbols are displayed moving (enlarged) over the entire display area of the image display device 5, so the pseudo consecutive symbols on the left and right are again invisible.

In addition, when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 3 and the moving display of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5 by drawing the image data 2 (variable display) are not executed.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characteristic section 193SG will be explained based on Figures 19-35 to 19-47.

First, if it is decided not to execute the special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, as shown in Figures 19-35(A) to 19-35(C), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, resulting in a reach. After that, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols move from the top to the bottom at a speed of V1 in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a convergence line from the periphery of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C). The convergence line is displayed with a density of D1 at the start of the display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time has passed.

If the variable display is a variable display according to the normal reach miss variable pattern PA2-1 that does not execute the pseudo consecutive performance, the pseudo consecutive symbols move downward on the image display device at a speed V2 without temporarily stopping and become invisible, as shown in FIG. 19-35 (D). At this time, the density of the convergence lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance (any of PA2-2 to PA2-4, PB1-2 to PB1-4), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols, as shown in FIG. 19-35 (E). In addition, the convergence lines become invisible. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification performance. Furthermore, as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position, the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits blue light.

Next, as shown in Figures 19-35 (F) and 19-35 (G), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is switched to being displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the left and right decorative patterns invisible to the player, and the blue light emission by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 19-35(G) and Fig. 19-35(H), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position, multiple cracks are displayed in the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern. After that, an image is displayed of the pseudo consecutive pattern with the multiple cracks displayed exploding, and as shown in Fig. 19-36(I) and Fig. 19-36(J), an image is displayed of the letters that made up the pseudo consecutive pattern (in the case of this feature part 193SG, the letters of "NEXT", which indicate that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed) spreading and moving towards the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-37(K) to FIG. 19-37(P), the first re-variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Furthermore, as a re-variable display notification effect, an image of character A is displayed on the image display device 5, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, if it has been decided to execute a cut-in preview effect or a group preview effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in preview effect or the group preview effect is executed in overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect.

When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the image "x2" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first first variable display start count notification performance, and blue effect images begin to be displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 again moves from the retracted position to the first performance position and emits blue light.

The "x2" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the first first variable display start count notification performance is displayed once on the image display device 5, then displayed in a larger size and then hidden (see Figure 19-37 (O) and Figure 19-37 (P)).

When the first variable display start count notification performance ends, the second movable body 193SG033 stops emitting blue light and moves from the first performance position to the retreat position. In addition, as the first second variable display start count notification performance, an image of "x2" smaller than the first variable display start count notification performance is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 5.

A short time after the first second variable display start count notification effect ends, as shown in Figures 19-38 (R) to 19-38 (T), the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, resulting in a reach, and then, as a second provisional stop suggestion effect, pseudo consecutive symbols move from above to below in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C at a speed of V1. At this time, in the image display device 5, a converging line is displayed from the periphery of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C). Note that the converging line is displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 over a certain period of time.

If the variable display is a normal reach miss variation pattern PA2-2 that executes the pseudo consecutive performance only once or a normal reach big win variation pattern PB1-2, the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop but moves downward on the image display device at a speed V2 and becomes invisible, as shown in FIG. 19-38 (U). At this time, the density of the convergence lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern that executes the pseudo consecutive performance two or more times (any of PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, and PB1-4), the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops and an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern, as shown in FIG. 19-38 (V). In addition, the convergence lines become invisible. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification performance. Furthermore, as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position, the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits green light.

Next, as shown in Figures 19-38 (W) and 19-38 (X), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is switched to being displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the decorative patterns on the left and right invisible to the player, and the green light emitted by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 19-38(X) and Fig. 19-38(Y), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position, multiple cracks are displayed in the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern. After that, an image is displayed of the pseudo consecutive pattern with the multiple cracks displayed exploding, and as shown in Fig. 19-39(Z) and Fig. 19-39(a), an image is displayed of the letters that made up the pseudo consecutive pattern (in the case of this feature part 193SG, the letters of "NEXT", which indicate that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed) spreading and moving towards the player.

Next, as shown in Figures 19-40(b) to 19-40(h), the second re-variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Furthermore, an image of character B is displayed on the image display device 5 as a re-variable display notification effect, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Furthermore, if it has been decided to execute a cut-in preview effect or a group preview effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in preview effect or the group preview effect is executed in overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect.

When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the image "x3" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start count notification performance, and green effect images begin to be displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 again moves from the retracted position to the first performance position and emits green light.

The "x3" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the second first variable display start count notification performance is displayed once on the image display device 5, then displayed in a larger size and then hidden (see Figures 19-40(f) and 19-40(g)).

When the first variable display start count notification performance ends, a "x3" image smaller than the first variable display start count notification performance is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 5 as the second second variable display start count notification performance.

A little while after the second second variable display start count notification effect ends, as shown in Figures 19-41 (e) to 19-41 (g), the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, resulting in a reach, and then the pseudo consecutive symbols move from above to below in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C at a speed of V1 as the third provisional stop suggestion effect. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a convergence line from the periphery of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C). Note that the convergence line is displayed with a density of D1 at the start of display, but the density changes to D2 after a certain period of time has passed.

If the variable display is a variation pattern PA2-3 of a super reach miss in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed only twice or a variation pattern PB1-3 of a super reach big win, the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop but moves downward on the image display device at a speed V2 and becomes invisible, as shown in FIG. 19-41 (h). At this time, the density of the convergence lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variation pattern (PA2-3, PA2-4, PB1-3, or PB1-4) in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed two or more times, as shown in FIG. 19-41 (i), the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops and an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern. In addition, the convergence lines become invisible. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification performance. Furthermore, as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position, the built-in second movable body LED 193SG034 emits red light.

Next, as shown in Figures 19-41(j) and 19-41(k), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is switched to being displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the left and right decorative patterns invisible to the player, and the red light emitted by the second movable body 193SG033 ends. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position.

Furthermore, as shown in Fig. 19-41(k) and Fig. 19-41(l), as the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the first performance position to the retreat position, multiple cracks are displayed in the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive pattern. After that, an image of the pseudo consecutive pattern with the multiple cracks displayed exploding is displayed, and as shown in Fig. 19-42(m) and Fig. 19-42(n), an image of the letters that made up the pseudo consecutive pattern (in the case of this feature part 193SG, the letters of "NEXT" indicating that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed) spreading and moving toward the player is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-43(o) to FIG. 19-43(u), the third re-variable display of the decorative pattern is started. Furthermore, as a re-variable display notification effect, an image of character C is displayed on the image display device 5, and a re-variable display notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Furthermore, if it has been decided to execute a cut-in preview effect or a group preview effect at the start of the variable display, the cut-in preview effect or the group preview effect is executed in overlap with the re-variable display notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect.

When the re-variable display notification performance ends, the image "x4" is displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start count notification performance, and red effect images begin to be displayed on both the left and right ends of the image display device 5. At this time, the second movable body 193SG033 again moves from the retracted position to the first performance position and emits red light.

The "x4" image displayed on the image display device 5 as the third first variable display start count notification effect is displayed once on the image display device 5, and then displayed in a larger size (see Figure 19-43 (s) and Figure 19-43 (t)).

When the first variable display start count notification effect ends, a "x4" image smaller than the first variable display start count notification effect is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display device 5 as the third second variable display start count notification effect.

Now, we will explain the execution of the temporary stop suggestion effect. As shown in Figures 19-44(A) and 19-44(B), when the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the pseudo-repeated pattern moves from top to bottom at speed V1 on the image display device 5 as described above, and the converging lines are displayed at density D2. As the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses and the pseudo-repeated pattern approaches the temporary stop position, a pseudo-repeated pattern (a pseudo-repeated pattern drawn with image data 3) different from the pseudo-repeated pattern (a pseudo-repeated pattern drawn with image data 2) that moves from top to bottom at speed V1 is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 (the temporary stop position of the decorative pattern), suggesting a temporary stop of the pseudo-repeated pattern.

If the decorative pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 19-44(C), the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops, causing an effect image for notifying a temporary stop to be displayed around the pseudo consecutive pattern, and the second movable body 193SG033, which has moved from the retreat position to the first effect position, emits light in a color according to the number of temporary stops (number of pseudo consecutive stops) (blue for the first temporary stop, green for the second temporary stop, and red for the third temporary stop). Also, the converging lines displayed on the image display device 5 at this time are no longer displayed.

On the other hand, if the decorative pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, as shown in Figures 19-44 (D) and 19-44 (E), the pseudo consecutive pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern drawn from image data 3) in the center of the image display device 5 becomes hidden, and the pseudo consecutive pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern drawn from image data 2) that had been moving from top to bottom at speed V1 passes the temporary stop position at speed V2 and moves toward the bottom of the image display device 5 and becomes hidden. At the same time, the normal moving display of the decorative pattern is executed from top to bottom of the image display device 5 (variable display is executed).

The density of the convergent lines displayed on the image display device 5 changes from D2 to D1 (the number of convergent lines displayed decreases) from the timing when the pseudo-repeated pattern starts to move at speed V2. Then, the convergent lines whose density has changed to D1 are no longer displayed a certain period of time after the pseudo-repeated pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 19-44(F) and Fig. 19-44(G), after the convergence lines are hidden, a variable display is performed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C with the decorative patterns other than the pseudo consecutive patterns for a while, then a reach effect is performed according to the variation pattern, and finally a decorative pattern indicating a big win or a miss is derived and displayed (in the case of this feature part 193SG, a "1" which is a big win combination, or a decorative pattern with a number other than "1" which is a miss combination stops in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C). In other words, if the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop in the temporary stop suggestion effect, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden from the image display device 5, but the convergence lines are hidden before the decorative patterns stop in a big win or miss combination (more precisely, before the reach effect starts).

As described above, with regard to the variable display when the special temporary stop notification effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 19-45, the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" and "left" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) are less visible than before the temporary stop indication effect was executed due to the concentration lines being displayed at density D1 during the temporary stop indication effect (visibility: low). In addition, the left and right decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" and "left" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R) are even less visible due to the concentration line density changing to D2 (visibility: medium).

In addition, the left and right decorative symbols during the temporary stop notification performance period are more visible during the period from the start of the temporary stop notification performance (temporary stop timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols) to when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed around the pseudo consecutive symbols, than during the temporary stop suggestion performance period (visibility: medium).

In addition, once the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 during the temporary stop notification performance period, it becomes invisible to the player for the remainder of the temporary stop notification performance period (moving display of the pseudo consecutive patterns toward the player) and the re-variable display notification performance period.

Then, from the start timing of the variable display start count notification performance, the left and right decorative symbols are displayed again on the image display device. At this time, these left and right decorative symbols are partially overlapped with the displays such as "x2", "x3", and "x4" displayed in the center of the image display device 5, so that the visibility (medium visibility) is the same as immediately after the start of the temporary stop notification performance.

Then, the decorative symbols on the left and right become invisible to the player as the "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are enlarged (moved towards the player), and these "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are switched to small displays in the upper left corner of the image display device 5, making them the most visible (high visibility).

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, as shown in Fig. 19-36 to Fig. 19-37, Fig. 19-39 to Fig. 19-40, Fig. 19-42 to Fig. 19-43, the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect and the execution period of the re-variable display notification effect are different (the re-variable display notification effect is executed after the execution of the temporary stop notification effect), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the temporary stop notification effect and the execution period of the re-variable display notification effect may overlap in part. For example, as shown in Fig. 19-36 to Fig. 19-37, when the pseudo-sequence pattern explodes and moves forward as a temporary stop notification effect on the image display device 5, a part of the pseudo-sequence pattern (for example, the letter "E") is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5 and then erased, while the display of the image of the character as the re-variable display notification effect is started on the rear side of the part of the pseudo-sequence pattern. By doing this, the image of the character becomes gradually visible to the player as the pseudo consecutive patterns are erased, improving the presentation effect, and furthermore, it becomes possible to transition the image displayed on the image display device 5 without any sense of discomfort.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, as shown in FIG. 19-35(H) and the like, an image in which a crack appears in a pseudo-repeated pattern is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, and the image itself explodes. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image with the crack and the image of the explosion may be different images. For example, as a temporary stop notification effect, after displaying an image in which a crack appears in a pseudo-repeated pattern on the image display device 5, an image in which smoke or light comes out of the cracks is displayed. Then, the smoke or light image makes it difficult for the player to see the pseudo-repeated pattern, and an image of an explosion is displayed in place of the pseudo-repeated pattern. This also makes it possible to transition the images displayed on the image display device 5 without any sense of incongruity.

Next, if it is decided to execute a special temporary stop notification effect at the start of the variable display, a reach will occur a while after the variable display starts, as shown in Figures 19-46 (A) to 19-46 (C). Then, as the first temporary stop suggestion effect, a moving display of the pseudo consecutive symbols indicating the execution of a pseudo consecutive effect is executed at a slower speed (speed V1) than normal in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C. Then, at the same time as the temporary stop re-effect period ends, the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop. At this time, a temporary stop notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R as a temporary stop notification effect.

As shown in Figures 19-46 (D) to 19-46 (H), when the output of the temporary stop notification sound ends, the display of the first special background image begins on the image display device 5, and the first re-variable display of the decorative pattern begins. At this time, if it has been decided at the start of the variable display that a cut-in preview performance or a group preview performance will be performed, overlapping with the re-variable display notification performance.

Then, when the cut-in effect or group preview effect ends, the first second variable display start count notification effect is executed without executing the first variable display start count notification effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 19-47(I) to FIG. 19-47(N), the second temporary stop of the decorative symbols causes the first special background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be displayed on the second special background image, and the decorative symbols are displayed again in a variable manner, with a cut-in preview effect, a group preview effect, and a second second variable display start count notification effect being executed, and the third temporary stop of the decorative symbols causes the second special background image displayed on the image display device 5 to be displayed on the third special background image, and the decorative symbols are displayed again in a variable manner, with a cut-in preview effect, a group preview effect, and a third second variable display start count notification effect being executed. Then, a reach effect is executed, and the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a miss.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 193SG, as shown in Figs. 19-33 and 19-34, as a temporary stop suggestion effect, the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is reduced by displaying convergent lines at density D1 on the image display device 5, and then the visibility of the left and right decorative symbols is further reduced by displaying convergent lines at density D2, thereby increasing the player's anticipation that the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop due to the temporary stop suggestion effect. And as a temporary stop notification effect, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the left and right decorative symbols invisible, thereby increasing the excitement of the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19-44, in the case where the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop after the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo-consecutive patterns are no longer displayed on the image display device 5. Therefore, in the case where the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns should have temporarily stopped, making it easier for the player to recognize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns did not temporarily stop, and easing the player's disappointment that the pseudo-consecutive patterns did not temporarily stop, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-33, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the concentration lines are displayed at density D2 before the timing of switching the display image data, and the concentration lines are displayed at density D1 after the timing of switching the display image data, so the visibility of the decorative patterns on the left and right is higher after the timing of switching the display image data than before the timing of switching the display image data. In other words, by increasing the transparency of the concentration lines after the timing of switching the display image data, the player is made aware that the pseudo consecutive patterns will not temporarily stop, and by drawing attention to the background image through the concentration lines, the player's disappointment that the pseudo consecutive patterns did not temporarily stop can be alleviated.

In addition, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the convergence lines will be hidden before the decorative symbols that form a combination that will result in a jackpot or a miss together with the decorative symbols on the left and right in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C stop, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the stopping of the decorative symbols after the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop for a temporary stop.

Also, as shown in Figures 19-35(G) to 19-35(H), when the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first performance position, and an image of the pseudo consecutive symbols cracking and exploding (an image of the pseudo consecutive symbols moving towards the player) is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 and the display of the exploding pseudo consecutive symbols can give an even stronger impression to the player that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped.

In particular, with this feature 193SG, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position as a temporary stop notification performance, so that the pseudo consecutive symbols and a part of the second movable body 193SG033 overlap when viewed from the front. This prevents the second movable body 193SG033 from making it difficult for the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols, while giving the player the impression that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, an example of the transformation of the pseudo-consecutive patterns is shown as an explosion of the pseudo-consecutive patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. Examples of the transformation of the pseudo-consecutive patterns may include the pseudo-consecutive patterns changing into a specific figure shape (e.g., a circle or a triangle) or the size of the pseudo-consecutive patterns changing from before the temporary stop.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the retracted position to the first performance position, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped, in addition to or instead of the second movable body 193SG033, the movable body 32 may be moved to the first performance position or a position different from the first performance position, which overlaps with at least a part of the pseudo consecutive pattern when viewed from the front.

Also, as shown in Figures 19-35 (F) and 19-35 (G), in the temporary stop notification presentation, the second movable body 193SG033 is moved from the first presentation position to the retreat position before the pseudo consecutive symbols are hidden on the image display device 5, so the movement of the second movable body 193SG033 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the pseudo consecutive symbols will be hidden on the image display device 5.

In addition, the variable display of the characteristic part 193SG can execute pseudo consecutive performances up to three times, and each time the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped and a re-variable display is executed as one of these pseudo consecutive performances, a display such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. corresponding to the re-variable display count is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start count notification performance. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19-37(O), when the first variable display start count notification performance is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retreat position to the first performance position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and a part of the display such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. overlap when viewed from the front, so that the display such as "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. corresponding to the variable display count can be drawn to, improving the performance effect.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 19-37(O), 19-40(f), and 19-43(s), when displaying "x2" as a variable display start count notification effect, the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated blue, when displaying "x3" the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated green, and when displaying "x4" the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated red, thereby making it possible to draw the player's attention to the display of the first variable display start count notification effect, thereby improving the presentation effect.

In addition, in this characteristic part 193SG, when the first variable display start count notification performance is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 moves from the retracted position to the first performance position, and the second movable body 193SG033 and the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. are partially overlapped when viewed from the front. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first variable display start count notification performance is executed, the second movable body 193SG033 and the display of "x2", "x3", "x4", etc. may be completely overlapped.

As shown in Fig. 19-33, Fig. 19-35, and Fig. 19-44, the temporary stop suggestion performance displays a converging line while displaying a pseudo consecutive pattern as a temporary stop suggestion image in the center of the image display device 5, which makes it easier for the performance control CPU 120 to control the display of the temporary stop suggestion performance, and prevents the switching of image data (switching from the image data shown in Fig. 19-3 to the image data shown in Fig. 19-4) from becoming unnatural at the timing of switching the display image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop. In particular, after the timing of switching the display image data, the pseudo consecutive patterns move downward from the center of the image display device 5, so by displaying the pseudo consecutive patterns in advance as a temporary stop suggestion image in the center of the image display device 5, the switching of image data at the timing of switching the display image data can be performed in a more natural way that gives an even more uncomfortable feeling to the player.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this characteristic section 193SG, the presentation control CPU 120 can display an image on the image display device 5 by synthesizing the data rendered as image data 1, image data 2, image data 3, and image data 4, as shown in Figs. 19-3 and 19-4. In particular, the pseudo consecutive patterns as temporary stop images are rendered as image data 1, which has the highest display priority, the decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns are rendered as image data 2, which has a lower display priority than image data 1, and the convergent lines as temporary stop suggestion presentations are rendered as image data 4, which has the lowest display priority, so that the degree of freedom of the decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns during moving display (variable display), the pseudo consecutive patterns as temporary stop suggestion images, and the convergent lines as temporary stop suggestion presentations can be increased.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG, as shown in FIG. 19-35(H), FIG. 19-36(I), and FIG. 19-36(J), when the pseudo consecutive symbols explode and move forward on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect, the left and right decorative symbols are not visible to the player, whereas as shown in FIG. 19-37(O), when "x2" or the like is displayed on the image display device 5 as the first variable display start count notification effect, the left and right decorative symbols are visible to the player, so that the presentation effect of the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect (particularly the display of "x2" or the like) can be enhanced, and since the left and right decorative symbols are visible to the player during the first variable display start count notification effect, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that a re-variable display is being executed.

In addition, the part where the pseudo consecutive symbols explode and move as shown in Figures 19-35 (H), 19-36 (I), 19-36 (J), etc., and the part where the displays "x2", "x3", "x4", etc., as shown in Figures 19-37 (O), 19-37 (P), etc., are both moving displays (enlarged displays) facing the player, so that the effects of the temporary stop notification effect and the first variable display start count notification effect can be enhanced by these moving displays facing the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-33, in the case where the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the timing of switching the display image data is V1, but the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols after the timing of switching the display image data is V3, so the player can easily grasp whether it is before or after the timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping (before or after the timing of switching the display image data) based on the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols.

In addition, in this characteristic section 193SG, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the timing of switching the display image data is slower than the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns after the timing of switching the display image data, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the timing of switching the display image data may be faster than the moving speed of the pseudo-consecutive patterns after the timing of switching the display image data.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-34, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping is V1, but the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols after the timing of the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopping is V2, so the player can easily understand whether the pseudo consecutive symbols are before or after the temporary stop based on the movement speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols.

In particular, in this feature section 193SG, as shown in Figures 19-34 and 19-35, the pseudo consecutive symbols before the provisional stop move from top to bottom, but the pseudo consecutive symbols after the provisional stop move toward the player (the player's side). Therefore, the direction of movement of the pseudo consecutive symbols makes it easier for the player to tell whether the pseudo consecutive symbols are before or after the provisional stop, and misinterpretation of the pseudo consecutive symbols' movement display can be prevented.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, an example is given in which the direction of movement of the pseudo consecutive symbols is different before and after the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the direction of movement of the pseudo consecutive symbols may be the same before and after the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop. Furthermore, the direction of movement of the pseudo consecutive symbols after the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop does not have to be toward the player (the front side) as long as it is different from the direction of movement of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the temporary stop.

In addition, in this feature section 193SG, in the case where the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing is slower than the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the number of display frames for displaying the image of the pseudo-continuous pattern before the display image data switching timing and the number of display frames for displaying the pseudo-continuous pattern after the display image data switching timing may be different. In addition, in the case where the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop, the period during which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed before the display image data switching timing (the performance period during which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed) and the period during which the pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed after the display image data switching timing may be different. In other words, in the present invention, "the speed at which the specific performance identification information (the pseudo-consecutive patterns in this feature section 193SG) moves is different" includes the number of display frames required to display the pseudo-consecutive patterns being different, and the period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed (the performance period during which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed).

The characteristic features 193SG of the present invention have been described above using drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 193SG, a form was exemplified in which a concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion performance to draw the player's attention to whether the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop in the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C), but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in Figs. 19-48(A) to 19-48(D) as a modified example 193SG-1, a concentration line may be displayed on the image display device 5 during the temporary stop suggestion performance, and the concentration line may be moved toward the center of the image display device 5 according to the progress of the temporary stop suggestion performance (the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved toward the center of the image display device 5). In this way, the player can identify that the pseudo consecutive symbols may stop in the center of the image display device 5, so that if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop, the player can more easily recognize that the pseudo consecutive symbols did not temporarily stop.

In addition, in the characteristic part 193SG, a form is exemplified in which a concentration line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion performance, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the second movable body 193SG033 (second movable body LED 293SG034) is illuminated in a color corresponding to the number of temporary stops. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-2, when a temporary stop suggestion performance is executed, the concentration line may be displayed on the image display device 5 in a color corresponding to the number of times the temporary stop suggestion performance is executed. For example, when the first temporary stop suggestion performance is executed, the concentration line is displayed in blue, when the second temporary stop suggestion performance is executed, the concentration line is displayed in green, and when the third temporary stop suggestion performance is executed, the concentration line is displayed in red. In this way, when the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated as a temporary stop notification performance, the second movable body 193SG033 is illuminated in the same color as the concentration line displayed as the temporary stop suggestion performance, so that the performance effect can be improved.

In addition, in the characteristic section 193SG, a form in which a cut-in preview effect and a group preview effect can be executed as preview effects that suggest that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-3, as a preview effect, for example, a performance that changes the display mode of the decorative pattern or changes the direction of the variable display from the timing of the start of the variable display or the timing of the re-variable display when the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped may be executed.

In this way, when it is possible to execute an effect that changes the display mode of the decorative pattern or changes the direction of the variable display as a preview effect, the execution of the preview effect may be restricted if the display of "x2", "x3", or "x4" is moved (enlarged) toward the player as the first variable display start count notification effect. This prevents the player from becoming unaware that the re-variable display will be executed as a result of the execution of the preview effect.

In addition, in the characteristic section 193SG, when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped, a form in which the re-variable display is executed on the image display device 5 without displaying an image that impairs the visibility of the pseudo consecutive patterns from the player's perspective is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 193SG-4, when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped, a visibility-impeding image (e.g., an image of an explosion) that reduces the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive patterns on the image display device 5 may be displayed, and the re-variable display may be executed after the visibility-impeding image is made non-display. In this way, the visibility-impeding image is displayed before the re-variable display is executed, making it easy to understand that the re-variable display is being executed.

Furthermore, a light guide plate made of a transparent plate material capable of displaying the above-mentioned visibility-impeding image by shining light from the outer peripheral side may be provided in front of the image display device 5 (at a position between the image display device 5 and the player) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing so, when the pseudo consecutive patterns are temporarily stopped, the visibility-impeding image is displayed on the light guide plate, making it difficult for the player to see the pseudo consecutive patterns displayed on the image display device 5, thereby improving the impression on the player and enhancing the presentation effect of the visibility-impeding image.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo consecutive symbols always move downward and are not displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 193SG-5, even if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5, the pseudo consecutive symbols may temporarily stop at the center of the image display device 5 after starting to move downward. In this case, the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols before the timing of switching the display image data may be made different from the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive symbols when they return to the center of the image display device 5 after passing through the center of the image display device 5, so that the player can easily understand whether the pseudo consecutive symbols are before passing through the center of the image display device 5 or after passing through the center of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, if the pseudo consecutive patterns pass through the center of the image display device 5 and then return to the center of the image display device 5, the convergence lines may not be displayed again. By doing so, it is possible to make it even easier for the player to understand that the pseudo consecutive patterns pass through the center of the image display device 5 and then return to the center of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the characteristic section 193SG, the pseudo consecutive performance can be executed up to three times during the variable display, and when three pseudo consecutive performances are executed during the variable display, a super reach reach performance is executed in the same way as when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed twice, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed the maximum number of times during the variable display (three times in the case of this characteristic section 193SG), a reach performance different from when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed less than the maximum number of times during the variable display (for example, a full rotation reach performance that has a higher probability of the variable display result being a jackpot than other super reach reach performances) may be executed. Note that when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed the maximum number of times during the variable display in this way, the full rotation reach performance may be executed without going through the re-variable display notification performance after the temporary stop notification performance.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 193SG, a pseudo consecutive performance is exemplified in which the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped in the center (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) when the left and right decorative patterns are stopped with the same numerical value (reach state), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pseudo consecutive pattern may be temporarily stopped in a state other than the reach state. Furthermore, as described above, a decorative pattern different from the pseudo consecutive pattern may be temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C as a pseudo consecutive performance. Note that, for a form in which a decorative pattern different from the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C as a pseudo consecutive performance, the decorative pattern may be temporarily stopped in a specific combination, such as a combination of odd and even numbers such as "135" and "246", or a combination of so-called offset numbers such as "112" and "334".

(Description of Characteristic Part 225SG in the Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, a description will be given of a characteristic section 225SG according to an embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as the present characteristic section 225SG). Note that, in the present characteristic section 225SG, a description of the same configuration as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be omitted.

The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a state advantageous to a player (e.g., a jackpot gaming state),
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) capable of displaying a performance image;
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state by displaying a specific image displayed on the display means;
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
A front-stage effect in which the specific image is moved and displayed (for example, a temporary stop suggestion effect shown in FIG. 20-4(C) to FIG. 20-4(E)),
A first post-stage performance that is a successful mode in which the specific image is stopped and displayed after the execution of the pre-stage performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (G) to FIG. 20-4 (H), a part where a pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped);
A second subsequent performance that is a failure mode in which the moving display of the specific image continues after the execution of the first performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-4(F), a part in which the pseudo consecutive patterns continue to be displayed in a moving manner without being temporarily stopped and are not displayed) can be executed.
This is a characteristic feature of the device.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to grasp whether a suggestive performance is successful or unsuccessful, thereby increasing the interest in the suggestive performance.

The gaming machine of form 2 is
In the first stage, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-1, a portion in which a concentrated line with a transmittance of 50% is displayed in preference to a decorative pattern or a pseudo-repeated pattern),
In the first latter stage performance, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, an opaque effect display is displayed, so that the specific image is temporarily difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (G), a part where an effect image for a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed).
In the second latter stage performance, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-4(F), when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed).
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, the translucent effect display can increase the interest of the early performance in which it is unclear whether the specific image being displayed in a moving manner will be displayed still or not, and the specific image can be made difficult to see when it is displayed still, reducing the sense of incongruity when it is displayed still and emphasizing that it is displayed still, thereby increasing the interest of the later performance.

The gaming machine of form 3 is
In the first stage performance, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-5 as modified example 225SG-1, a portion where a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in priority to a convergence line),
When the first latter stage performance is executed, an opaque effect display is displayed when the first latter stage performance is executed, so that the specific image is temporarily difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-6 (G), a portion where an effect image for a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is displayed),
When the second latter stage performance is executed, the opaque effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-6(F), when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed).
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, by displaying the effect display in the background of the specific image, it is possible to increase the interest of the early performance in which it is unclear whether the specific image being displayed in a moving manner will be displayed still or not, and by making it difficult to see when the specific image is displayed still, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity when the image is displayed still and to emphasize that the image is displayed still, thereby increasing the interest of the later performance.

The gaming machine of form 4 is
In the first stage performance, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-5 as modified example 225SG-1, a portion where a decorative pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed in priority to a convergence line),
In the second latter stage performance, an effect display is displayed on the background side of the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the specific image is erased (for example, as shown in Fig. 20-7(F) to Fig. 20-7(H) as modified example 225SG-2, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are no longer displayed on the image display device 5 due to the moving display of the pseudo consecutive patterns).
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, by displaying an effect display in the background of the specific image, it is possible to increase the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether the specific image being displayed moving will be displayed still or not, and in the second second stage performance, the interest of the second stage performance is also increased by displaying an effect display from before the failure mode occurs until a predetermined period after the specific image is erased.

The gaming machine of form 5 is
In the first stage performance, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-1, a portion in which a converging line with a transmittance of 50% is displayed in preference to a decorative pattern or a pseudo-repeated pattern),
In the second latter stage performance, a semi-transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image before the failure mode occurs, and the effect display is displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the specific image is erased (for example, as shown in Fig. 20-8(F) to Fig. 20-8(H) as modified example 225SG-3, when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop, the convergence lines continue to be displayed even after the pseudo consecutive patterns are hidden on the image display device 5 due to the moving display of the pseudo consecutive patterns).
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, by displaying a semi-transparent effect display on the specific image, it is possible to increase the interest of the first stage performance in which it is unclear whether the specific image being displayed moving will be displayed stationary or not, and also in the second second stage performance, by displaying the effect display from before the failure mode occurs until a predetermined period after the specific image is erased, it is possible to increase the interest of the second stage performance.

The gaming machine of form 6 is
In the first stage performance, a semi-transparent, highly transparent effect display is displayed on the specific image (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-1, a portion in which a convergent line with a transmittance of 50% is displayed in preference to a decorative pattern or a pseudo-repeated pattern),
In the first latter stage performance, when the specific image is stopped and displayed, a low-transparency effect display with a lower transparency than the high-transparency effect display is displayed, so that the specific image is temporarily difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-9 as modified example 225SG-4, an effect image for a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 20% is displayed on the image display device 5, making it difficult for the player to see decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns).
In the second latter stage performance, the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, when the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5).
The gaming machine according to embodiment 1, characterized in that
According to this feature, by displaying a highly transparent effect display, it is possible to increase the interest of the early performance in which it is unclear whether a specific image being displayed in a moving manner will be displayed still or not, and by displaying a low-transparency effect display when a specific image is displayed still, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity at the time of the stopped display and to emphasize that the image is displayed still, thereby increasing the interest of the later performance.

The gaming machine of form 7 is
The first latter stage performance includes a performance in which the size of the specific image is enlarged compared to the size in the former stage performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-1 and FIG. 20-2, when the pseudo consecutive pattern is temporarily stopped, the pseudo consecutive pattern after the temporary stop is displayed in a larger size than the temporary stop),
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 6, characterized in that
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the visibility of the specific image displayed in a still state, and to further emphasize that the specific image is displayed in a still state.

The gaming machine of form 8 is
The degree of emphasis of the effect display in the first stage performance increases as the first stage performance progresses (for example, as shown in Figures 20-4 (C) to 20-4 (E), the convergence lines move toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses).
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 7, characterized in that
According to this feature, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the specific image to be frozen and displayed, and to further increase the interest of the early performance.

The gaming machine of form 9 is
A notice performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 18 ) capable of executing a notice performance that notifies the occurrence of a specific event,
During the period in which the effect display is displayed in the first subsequent performance and the second subsequent performance, the execution of the advance notice performance is restricted (for example, as a modified example 225SG-5, a part that restricts the execution of the advance notice performance when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification performance).
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 8, characterized in that
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview performance from being reduced by the effects, which would reduce the interest in the preview performance.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
As the suggestion performance, a first suggestion performance (for example, a pseudo consecutive suggestion performance shown in FIG. 20-11(C) as modified example 225SG-5) in which a first specific image (for example, an image having a left-right width dimension of L1 as a pseudo consecutive suggestion performance) is displayed on the display means to perform the first stage performance and the first subsequent stage performance, or the first stage performance and the second subsequent stage performance, and a second suggestion performance (for example, an active display change suggestion performance shown in FIG. 20-11(D) to FIG. 20-11(F) as modified example 225SG-5) in which a second specific image having a display dimension smaller than that of the first specific image (for example, an image of an arrow having a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2) as an active display change suggestion performance) is displayed on the display means to perform the first stage performance and the first subsequent stage performance, or the first stage performance and the second subsequent stage performance,
When executing the first latter stage performance as the first suggestion performance, an opaque effect display or a low-transparency effect display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-11 (B) , a part in the image display device 5 that displays an effect image for a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% together with an image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion performance),
When executing the first latter stage performance as the second suggestion performance, the opaque effect display or the low-transparency effect display is not displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 20-11 (D) to 20-11 (F), a portion in which an arrow image is displayed as an active display change notice performance on the image display device 5 while an effect image for a temporary stop notification with a transmittance of 0% is not displayed).
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects 2 to 9, characterized in that
According to this feature, in the second suggestion performance, an opaque effect display or a low-transparency effect display is not displayed when the first latter performance is executed, thereby preventing the second specific image, which has a small display size, from becoming difficult to understand due to the effect display.

First, the display control unit 123 in this characteristic unit 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores multiple types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a specific image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the performance control CPU 120, and can display a specific performance screen by arranging multiple types of image data and displaying an image on the image display device 5. When preventing a specific image from being displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, there are cases where other image data is arranged in front of the image data of the specific image with a transmittance of 0%, thereby controlling so that an image based on the image data of the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen, and cases where an image is displayed on the image display device 5 that has created display data in which the image data of the specific image is not arranged, thereby controlling so that the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen.

As shown in Figs. 20-1(A) to 20-1(C), 20-2(A) to 20-2(C), and 20-3(A) to 20-3(C), for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging multiple image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, Fig. 20-1 is image data immediately before the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a temporary stop suggestion performance in this feature section 225SG, Fig. 20-2 is image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, and Fig. 20-3 is image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 20-2(A), image data 1 is data that is drawn to display an effect image (effect image for temporary stop notification) to notify that the pseudo consecutive patterns have temporarily stopped across the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification performance.

As shown in FIG. 20-1 (A), the image data 2 is data that is drawn to display a converging line from the outer edge of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect.

As shown in Figures 20-1 (B), 20-2 (B), and 20-3 (A), the image data 3 is data that is drawn to display a pseudo-consecutive pattern moving from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance. In addition, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, the data is drawn to display the temporarily stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns at a larger size than when they are moving (as shown in FIG. 20-1(B), the horizontal dimension of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the temporary stop is a and the vertical dimension is b, but as shown in FIG. 20-2(B), the horizontal dimension of the pseudo-consecutive patterns when temporarily stopped is x (x>a) and the vertical dimension is y (y>b)), and immediately after the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends, the data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (patterns from "1" to "9" in this feature unit 225SG) from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 in place of the pseudo-consecutive patterns.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(B), the image data 4 is data that is drawn to display the pseudo consecutive symbols moving downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends.

As shown in Figs. 20-1 to 20-3, display priorities are set for these image data 1 to 4 for displaying the images on the image display device 5. The display priority is set highest for image data 1. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set lowest (image display priorities on the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). In other words, on the image display device 5, the image based on image data 1 is displayed as the topmost image, the image based on image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, the image based on image data 3 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1 and image data 2, and the image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3.

For this reason, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 20-1 (C), the image based on image data 2 (concentrated lines) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 3 (a moving display of pseudo consecutive symbols from top to bottom). Note that the concentrated lines in this feature section 225SG are set to a high transparency (for example, 50%), so that the player can see the decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols through the concentrated lines while the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed.

As shown in Fig. 20-2(C) and Fig. 20-2(D), immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped, the image based on image data 1 (the effect image for the temporary stop notification) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 3 (the pseudo consecutive symbols that have become larger in size than when they were moving due to the temporary stop). Note that the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden after a predetermined period of time has elapsed before the start of the re-variable display.

The effect image for the temporary stop notification in this feature section 225SG has a transparency set to 0%. In other words, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, as shown in Figures 20-2 (C) and 20-2 (D), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols invisible to the player, but after a certain period of time has passed, these decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the pseudo-repeated pattern does not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends, as shown in FIG. 20-3(C), the image based on image data 3 (a variable display of a decorative pattern different from the pseudo-repeated pattern) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 4 (a moving display of the pseudo-repeated pattern from the center downwards on the image display device 5).

In particular, in this feature section 225SG, while the temporary stop suggestion presentation is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 (display control section 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 20-1 on the image display device 5, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop.

In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) sets image data in which the pseudo-repeated patterns temporarily stop, regardless of whether the pseudo-repeated patterns temporarily stop at the start timing of the variable display, and executes the variable display. Then, at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-repeated patterns do not temporarily stop (see FIG. 19-33 of the characteristic unit 193 described above), the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data displayed on the image display device 5 from image data in which the pseudo-repeated patterns temporarily stop (FIGS. 20-1, 20-2) to image data in which the pseudo-repeated patterns do not temporarily stop, as shown in FIG. 20-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characteristic section 225SG will be explained based on FIG. 20-4.

First, as shown in Figures 20-4(A) to 20-4(C), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, resulting in a reach. After that, as the first tentative stop suggestion performance, the pseudo consecutive symbols move from top to bottom in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, as shown in Figures 20-4(C) to 20-4(E), in the image display device 5, as the pseudo consecutive symbols move toward the center of the image display device 5, a converging line is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5.

If the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that the converging lines are no longer displayed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols continue to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping, becoming hidden, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (F).

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figures 20-4 (G) and 20-4 (H), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5. Note that, as described above, the transparency of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0%, so the player cannot see the pseudo consecutive symbols due to the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped. Then, after the predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden, allowing the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols that are larger than those during the temporary stop notification effect.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 225SG, the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop. Furthermore, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily invisible. If the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are continuously moved toward the bottom of the image display device 5 without displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification, and then hidden. This makes it easier for the player to understand the success (temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols) and failure (non-temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols) of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and improves the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

In addition, during the temporary stop indication performance, a concentrated line with high transparency is displayed on the image display device 5, which draws the player's attention to whether the moving pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop or not, thereby increasing interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, an effect image with a transparency of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5 for notifying the player of the temporary stop, which reduces the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop and emphasizes that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped, thereby increasing interest in the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols.

In addition, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, the pseudo-consecutive patterns at the time of the temporary stop are displayed larger than before the temporary stop (the left-right width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the top-bottom width dimension is b, whereas the left-right width dimension at the time of the temporary stop is x (x>a) and the top-bottom width dimension is y (y>b)). This improves the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns and further emphasizes the temporary stop of the pseudo-consecutive patterns.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop than before the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size than before the temporary stop may be a timing just before the temporary stop, or a timing after the temporary stop, such as a timing when the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is no longer displayed.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop than before the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the shape or color of the pseudo-consecutive patterns may be changed from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop to emphasize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, as shown in Figures 20-4 (C) to 20-4 (E), converging lines are displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and the converging lines are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses, thereby increasing the degree of emphasis on whether the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation that the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, and improving the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop is increased by displaying the converging lines moving toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop may be increased by changing the color of the converging lines or increasing the number of lines displayed (increasing the density of the converging lines) as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses.

The characteristic features of the present invention, 225SG, have been described above using drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 225SG, as shown in FIG. 20-1, a form is exemplified in which a convergent line is drawn as image data 2, and a decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern is drawn as image data 3, thereby displaying the convergent line in priority over the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern on the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-1, as shown in FIG. 20-5(A) to FIG. 20-5(C), a convergent line may be drawn as image data 4, thereby displaying the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern in priority over the convergent line on the image display device 5 (displaying the convergent line as an image behind the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern).

By doing this, as shown in Figures 20-6 (A) to 20-6 (H), during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the concentration lines on the image display device 5 are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, and it is possible to prevent the concentration lines from making it difficult for the player to see the decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns.

In addition, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that the converging lines are hidden, and the pseudo consecutive symbols continue to move toward the bottom of the image display device without temporarily stopping, and are no longer displayed, as shown in Figure 20-6 (F).

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figures 20-6 (G) and 20-6 (H), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5. Note that, as described above, the transparency of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0%, so the player cannot see the pseudo consecutive symbols due to the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped. Then, after the predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden, allowing the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols that are larger than those during the temporary stop notification effect.

As described above, by displaying the convergence lines as an image behind the decorative pattern and pseudo consecutive patterns, it is possible to increase the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, which reduces the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop and emphasizes that the pattern has temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive patterns.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-1, if the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentration lines are hidden and then the pseudo-consecutive patterns continue to move downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped and are hidden. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 20-7(A) to 20-7(H) as modified example 225SG-2, if the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-consecutive patterns continue to move downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped and are hidden, while the concentration lines may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the pseudo-consecutive patterns are hidden, up to the timing when the variable display stops.

In this way, as in modified example 225SG-1, the concentration lines are displayed as an image behind the decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive pattern, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop. In addition, in cases where the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop, the concentration lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, thereby increasing the interest of whether or not the pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop. Although not shown in particular, in cases where the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops as a result of the performance of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as in the characteristic part 225SG, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player at the time of the temporary stop.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-2, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive pattern are displayed in priority over the convergence lines, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 20-8(A) to 20-8(H) as modified example 225SG-3, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines are displayed in priority over the decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive pattern, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, as with the feature portion 225SG, the decorative pattern and pseudo-repeated pattern are displayed as images behind the converging lines, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-repeated pattern will temporarily stop. In addition, in cases where the pseudo-repeated pattern does not temporarily stop, the converging lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-repeated pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, thereby increasing the interest of whether or not the pseudo-repeated pattern will temporarily stop. Although not shown in particular, in cases where the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as with the feature portion 225SG, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stops, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player at the time of the temporary stop.

In addition, in the characteristic section 225SG, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying a temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 as an image with a transmittance of 0%, and the stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns are temporarily made invisible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 20-9(A) to 20-9(C) as modified example 225SG-4, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying a temporary stop may be displayed on the image display device 5 as an image with a transmittance lower than that of the converging lines (for example, 20%).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 20-10, during the period when the concentration lines are displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-repeated patterns), the transparency of the concentration lines is high (for example, the aforementioned 50%), allowing the player to easily see the decorative patterns and pseudo-repeated patterns through the concentration lines, while during the period when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed as a temporary stop notification effect (the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-repeated patterns), the transparency is lower than that of the concentration lines (for example, the aforementioned 20%), making it more difficult for the player to see the decorative patterns and pseudo-repeated patterns than during the period when the concentration lines are displayed.

In this way, as with the feature portion 225SG, during the temporary stop suggestion effect, a converging line with a relatively high transparency is displayed, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Then, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), as with the feature portion 225SG, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, thereby reducing the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification can be used to emphasize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns have temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stopping.

In addition, in the characteristic section 225SG, a form in which a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect can be executed as effects related to the pseudo consecutive effects during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display, a notice effect (see FIG. 19-29 in the characteristic section 193SG) that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot may be executed as an effect different from these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects. Note that these notice effects may be executed when a convergence line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while the execution of the notice effect may be restricted when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. In this way, the execution of the notice effect can draw the player's attention to whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or not, and by restricting the execution of the notice effect when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the notice effect from being reduced by the effect image for the temporary stop notification, which reduces the interest of the notice effect.

Also, as a preview effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 20-11 as modified example 225SG-5, for example, a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect that suggests that when a pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops as a result of a temporary stop suggestion effect, a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect that suggests that a pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop again as a result of the next pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, an active display area 225SG005F that displays a pending memory display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display at a specified position of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower center of the image display device), and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and an active display change preview effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display will change may be executed.

In this way, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, for example, as shown in Figures 20-11 (A) to 20-11 (C), an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect at the top of the image display device 5 based on the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stopping as a result of the temporary stop preview effect, and an effect image for the temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period of time has passed since the temporary stop. In other words, the display of the image as the pseudo consecutive suggestion effect begins from the timing when the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops, but the image as the pseudo consecutive suggestion effect becomes visible to the player from the timing when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden.

On the other hand, when an active display change preview performance is executed as a preview performance, as shown in Figure 20-11 (A) and Figures 20-11 (D) to 20-11 (F), an effect image for notifying a temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, and an image of the active display change preview performance (in this modified example 225SG-5, an image of an arrow with a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2) flying from the right part of the image display device 5 toward the active display area 225SG005F) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change notice performance, as shown in FIG. 20-11 (E), an arrow coming from the right side of the image display device 5 pierces the active display, causing the display mode of the active display to change. When the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change notice performance, as shown in FIG. 20-11 (F), an arrow coming from the right side of the image display device 5 passes toward the left side of the image display device 5 without piercing the active display, and then becomes invisible.

In this way, in this modified example 225SG-5, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 together with an image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, making the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect temporarily invisible to the player, whereas when an active display change preview effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for a temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, and an image (arrow image) with a shorter display dimension than the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is displayed as the image for the active display change preview effect, thereby preventing the active display change preview effect from being obscured by the effect image for the temporary stop notification and becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in this modified example 225SG-5, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the pseudo consecutive pattern being temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop preview effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transparency other than 0% (for example, a transparency of 20% or 50%) may be displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 together with the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect.

(Description of Characteristic Part 225SG in the Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, a description will be given of a characteristic part 225SG according to an embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as the present characteristic part 225SG). Note that, in the present characteristic part 225SG, a description of the same configuration as that of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be omitted.

First, the display control unit 123 in this characteristic unit 225SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores multiple types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a specific image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the performance control CPU 120, and can display a specific performance screen by arranging multiple types of image data and displaying an image on the image display device 5. When preventing a specific image from being displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, there are cases where other image data is arranged in front of the image data of the specific image with a transmittance of 0%, thereby controlling so that an image based on the image data of the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen, and cases where an image is displayed on the image display device 5 that has created display data in which the image data of the specific image is not arranged, thereby controlling so that the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen.

As shown in Figs. 20-1(A) to 20-1(C), 20-2(A) to 20-2(C), and 20-3(A) to 20-3(C), for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging multiple image data including image data 1 to 4. Of these, Fig. 20-1 is image data immediately before the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a temporary stop suggestion performance in this feature section 225SG, Fig. 20-2 is image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, and Fig. 20-3 is image data when the pseudo consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop.

As shown in FIG. 20-2(A), image data 1 is data that is drawn to display an effect image (effect image for temporary stop notification) to notify that the pseudo consecutive patterns have temporarily stopped across the entire display area of the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification performance.

As shown in FIG. 20-1 (A), the image data 2 is data that is drawn to display a converging line from the outer edge of the image display device 5 to the center of the image display device 5 (the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C) as a temporary stop suggestion effect.

As shown in Figures 20-1 (B), 20-2 (B), and 20-3 (A), the image data 3 is data that is drawn to display a pseudo-consecutive pattern moving from the top to the bottom on the image display device 5 during execution of the temporary stop suggestion performance. In addition, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, the data is drawn to display the temporarily stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns at a larger size than when they are moving (as shown in FIG. 20-1(B), the horizontal dimension of the pseudo-consecutive patterns before the temporary stop is a and the vertical dimension is b, but as shown in FIG. 20-2(B), the horizontal dimension of the pseudo-consecutive patterns when temporarily stopped is x (x>a) and the vertical dimension is y (y>b)), and immediately after the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends, the data is drawn to display a variable display of normal decorative patterns (patterns from "1" to "9" in this feature unit 225SG) from the top to the bottom of the image display device 5 in place of the pseudo-consecutive patterns.

As shown in FIG. 20-3(B), the image data 4 is data that is drawn to display the pseudo consecutive symbols moving downward from the center of the image display device 5 immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends.

As shown in Figs. 20-1 to 20-3, display priorities are set for these image data 1 to 4 for displaying the images on the image display device 5. The display priority is set highest for image data 1. The display priority of image data 2 is set lower than that of image data 1, and the display priority of image data 3 is set lower than that of image data 2. The display priority of image data 4 is set lowest (image display priorities on the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3>image data 4). In other words, on the image display device 5, the image based on image data 1 is displayed as the topmost image, the image based on image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, the image based on image data 3 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1 and image data 2, and the image based on image data 4 is displayed as an image lower than that based on image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3.

For this reason, when the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 20-1 (C), the image based on image data 2 (concentrated lines) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 3 (a moving display of pseudo consecutive symbols from top to bottom). Note that the concentrated lines in this feature section 225SG are set to a high transparency (for example, 50%), so that the player can see the decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols through the concentrated lines while the temporary stop suggestion effect is being executed.

As shown in Fig. 20-2(C) and Fig. 20-2(D), immediately after the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped, the image based on image data 1 (the effect image for the temporary stop notification) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 3 (the pseudo consecutive symbols that have become larger in size than when they were moving due to the temporary stop). Note that the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden after a predetermined period of time has elapsed before the start of the re-variable display.

The effect image for the temporary stop notification in this feature section 225SG has a transparency set to 0%. In other words, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, as shown in Figures 20-2 (C) and 20-2 (D), the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols invisible to the player, but after a certain period of time has passed, these decorative symbols and pseudo consecutive symbols become visible to the player.

Immediately after the pseudo-repeated pattern does not temporarily stop and the temporary stop suggestion performance ends, as shown in FIG. 20-3(C), the image based on image data 3 (a variable display of a decorative pattern different from the pseudo-repeated pattern) is displayed in priority over the image based on image data 4 (a moving display of the pseudo-repeated pattern from the center downwards on the image display device 5).

In particular, in this feature section 225SG, while the temporary stop suggestion presentation is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 (display control section 123) displays the image data shown in FIG. 20-1 on the image display device 5, thereby drawing the player's attention to whether or not the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop.

In addition, in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect, the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) sets image data in which the pseudo-repeated patterns temporarily stop, regardless of whether the pseudo-repeated patterns temporarily stop at the start timing of the variable display, and executes the variable display. Then, at the display image data switching timing of the temporary stop suggestion effect in which the pseudo-repeated patterns do not temporarily stop (see FIG. 19-33 of the characteristic unit 193 described above), the performance control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data displayed on the image display device 5 from image data in which the pseudo-repeated patterns temporarily stop (FIGS. 20-1, 20-2) to image data in which the pseudo-repeated patterns do not temporarily stop, as shown in FIG. 20-3.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in the variable display that executes the temporary stop suggestion effect in this characteristic section 225SG will be explained based on FIG. 20-4.

First, as shown in Figures 20-4(A) to 20-4(C), when a certain period of time has passed since the start of the variable display, the decorative symbols stop (swinging stop) in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C, resulting in a reach. After that, as the first tentative stop suggestion performance, the pseudo consecutive symbols move from top to bottom in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, as shown in Figures 20-4(C) to 20-4(E), in the image display device 5, as the pseudo consecutive symbols move toward the center of the image display device 5, a converging line is displayed moving toward the center of the image display device 5.

If the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that the converging lines are no longer displayed, and the pseudo consecutive symbols continue to move downward on the image display device without temporarily stopping, becoming hidden, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (F).

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figures 20-4 (G) and 20-4 (H), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5. Note that, as described above, the transparency of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0%, so the player cannot see the pseudo consecutive symbols due to the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped. Then, after the predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden, allowing the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols that are larger than those during the temporary stop notification effect.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 225SG, the pseudo consecutive symbols are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 during the variable display of 1, and a temporary stop suggestion effect is executed that suggests that the pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop. Furthermore, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are temporarily stopped and an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed in the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the temporarily stopped pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily invisible. If the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo consecutive symbols are continuously moved toward the bottom of the image display device 5 without displaying the effect image for the temporary stop notification, and then hidden. This makes it easier for the player to understand the success (temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols) and failure (non-temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols) of the temporary stop suggestion effect, and improves the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

In addition, during the temporary stop indication performance, a concentrated line with high transparency is displayed on the image display device 5, which draws the player's attention to whether the moving pseudo consecutive symbols will temporarily stop or not, thereby increasing interest. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop, an effect image with a transparency of 0 is displayed on the image display device 5 for notifying the player of the temporary stop, which reduces the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop and emphasizes that the pseudo consecutive symbols have temporarily stopped, thereby increasing interest in the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive symbols.

In addition, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, the pseudo-consecutive patterns at the time of the temporary stop are displayed larger than before the temporary stop (the left-right width dimension before the temporary stop is a and the top-bottom width dimension is b, whereas the left-right width dimension at the time of the temporary stop is x (x>a) and the top-bottom width dimension is y (y>b)). This improves the visibility of the temporarily stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns and further emphasizes the temporary stop of the pseudo-consecutive patterns.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop than before the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size than before the temporary stop may be a timing just before the temporary stop, or a timing after the temporary stop, such as a timing when the effect image for notifying the temporary stop is no longer displayed.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the pseudo-consecutive patterns are displayed in a larger size from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop than before the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, thereby emphasizing that the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the shape or color of the pseudo-consecutive patterns may be changed from the timing when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop to emphasize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, as shown in Figures 20-4 (C) to 20-4 (E), converging lines are displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, and the converging lines are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion effect progresses, thereby increasing the degree of emphasis on whether the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation that the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, and improving the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect.

In addition, in this feature section 225SG, an example is given of a form in which the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop is increased by displaying the converging lines moving toward the center of the image display device 5 as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop may be increased by changing the color of the converging lines or increasing the number of lines displayed (increasing the density of the converging lines) as the temporary stop suggestion performance progresses.

The characteristic features of the present invention, 225SG, have been described above using drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 225SG, as shown in FIG. 20-1, a form is exemplified in which a convergent line is drawn as image data 2, and a decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern is drawn as image data 3, thereby displaying the convergent line in priority over the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern on the image display device 5; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 225SG-1, as shown in FIG. 20-5(A) to FIG. 20-5(C), a convergent line may be drawn as image data 4, thereby displaying the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern in priority over the convergent line on the image display device 5 (displaying the convergent line as an image behind the decorative pattern or pseudo-repeated pattern).

By doing this, as shown in Figures 20-6 (A) to 20-6 (H), during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the concentration lines on the image display device 5 are moved toward the center of the image display device 5 to increase the degree of emphasis on whether or not the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop, and it is possible to prevent the concentration lines from making it difficult for the player to see the decorative patterns and pseudo consecutive patterns.

In addition, if the pseudo consecutive symbols do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 (display control unit 123) switches the image data, so that the converging lines are hidden, and the pseudo consecutive symbols continue to move toward the bottom of the image display device without temporarily stopping, and are no longer displayed, as shown in Figure 20-6 (F).

On the other hand, if the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as shown in Figures 20-6 (G) and 20-6 (H), the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stop and an effect image for temporary stop notification is displayed across the entire display area of the image display device 5. Note that, as described above, the transparency of the effect image for temporary stop notification is set to 0%, so the player cannot see the pseudo consecutive symbols due to the effect image for temporary stop notification until a predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped. Then, after the predetermined period has passed since the pseudo consecutive symbols temporarily stopped, the effect image for temporary stop notification is hidden, allowing the player to see the pseudo consecutive symbols that are larger than those during the temporary stop notification effect.

As described above, by displaying the convergence lines as an image behind the decorative pattern and pseudo consecutive patterns, it is possible to increase the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Furthermore, when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, which reduces the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop and emphasizes that the pattern has temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop of the pseudo consecutive patterns.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-1, if the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the concentration lines are hidden and then the pseudo-consecutive patterns continue to move downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped and are hidden. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 20-7(A) to 20-7(H) as modified example 225SG-2, if the pseudo-consecutive patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the pseudo-consecutive patterns continue to move downward on the image display device without being temporarily stopped and are hidden, while the concentration lines may continue to be displayed for a predetermined period of time even after the pseudo-consecutive patterns are hidden, up to the timing when the variable display stops.

In this way, as in modified example 225SG-1, the concentration lines are displayed as an image behind the decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive pattern, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop. In addition, in cases where the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop, the concentration lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, thereby increasing the interest of whether or not the pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop. Although not shown in particular, in cases where the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops as a result of the performance of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as in the characteristic part 225SG, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player at the time of the temporary stop.

In addition, in the modified example 225SG-2, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive pattern are displayed in priority over the convergence lines, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 20-8(A) to 20-8(H) as modified example 225SG-3, during the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines are displayed in priority over the decorative pattern and the pseudo consecutive pattern, and when the pseudo consecutive pattern does not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion performance, the convergence lines may be continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo consecutive pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, as with the feature portion 225SG, the decorative pattern and pseudo-repeated pattern are displayed as images behind the converging lines, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-repeated pattern will temporarily stop. In addition, in cases where the pseudo-repeated pattern does not temporarily stop, the converging lines are continuously displayed for a predetermined period of time after the pseudo-repeated pattern is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, thereby increasing the interest of whether or not the pseudo-repeated pattern will temporarily stop. Although not shown in particular, in cases where the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stops as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, as with the feature portion 225SG, an effect image for notifying the temporary stop is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo-repeated pattern temporarily stops, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player at the time of the temporary stop.

In addition, in the characteristic section 225SG, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying a temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 as an image with a transmittance of 0%, and the stopped pseudo-consecutive patterns are temporarily made invisible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figs. 20-9(A) to 20-9(C) as modified example 225SG-4, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, an effect image for notifying a temporary stop may be displayed on the image display device 5 as an image with a transmittance lower than that of the converging lines (for example, 20%).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 20-10, during the period when the concentration lines are displayed as a temporary stop suggestion effect (the period until the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-repeated patterns), the transparency of the concentration lines is high (for example, the above-mentioned 50%), so that the player can easily see the decorative patterns and pseudo-repeated patterns through the concentration lines, while during the period when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed as the temporary stop notification effect (the period after the temporary stop timing of the pseudo-repeated patterns), the transparency is lower than that of the concentration lines (for example, the above-mentioned 20%), so that the player may find it more difficult to see the decorative patterns and pseudo-repeated patterns than during the period when the concentration lines are displayed. Although not specifically shown in this modified example 225SG-4, if the pseudo-repeated patterns do not temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect, the effect image for the temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, as in other characteristic parts and modified examples.

In this way, as with the feature portion 225SG, during the temporary stop suggestion effect, a converging line with a relatively high transparency is displayed, thereby increasing the interest of the temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the pseudo-consecutive patterns will temporarily stop. Then, when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop as a result of the temporary stop suggestion effect (when the temporary stop notification effect is executed), as with the feature portion 225SG, an effect image for the temporary stop notification is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5 when the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stop, thereby reducing the player's sense of discomfort at the time of the temporary stop, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification can be used to emphasize that the pseudo-consecutive patterns have temporarily stopped, thereby increasing the interest of the pseudo-consecutive patterns temporarily stopping.

In addition, in the characteristic section 225SG, a form in which a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification effect can be executed as effects related to the pseudo consecutive effects during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 225SG-5, a preview effect (see FIG. 19-29 in the characteristic section 193SG) that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot may be executed as an effect different from these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects during the variable display. Note that these preview effects may be executed when a convergence line is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop suggestion effect, while the execution of the preview effect may be restricted when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 as a temporary stop notification effect. In this way, the execution of the preview effect can draw the player's attention to whether the variable display result will be a jackpot or not, and by restricting the execution of the preview effect when an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the preview effect from being reduced by the effect image for the temporary stop notification, which reduces the interest of the preview effect.

Also, as a preview effect that can be executed during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 20-11 as modified example 225SG-5, for example, a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect that suggests that when a pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops as a result of a temporary stop suggestion effect, a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect that suggests that a pseudo consecutive pattern will temporarily stop again as a result of the next pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, an active display area 225SG005F that displays a pending memory display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display at a specified position of the image display device 5 (for example, the lower center of the image display device), and by changing the display mode of the active display, an active display preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and an active display change preview effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display will change may be executed.

In this way, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, for example, as shown in Figures 20-11 (A) to 20-11 (C), an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect at the top of the image display device 5 based on the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stopping as a result of the temporary stop preview effect, and an effect image for the temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden when a predetermined period of time has passed since the temporary stop. In other words, the display of the image as the pseudo consecutive suggestion effect begins from the timing when the pseudo consecutive pattern temporarily stops, but the image as the pseudo consecutive suggestion effect becomes visible to the player from the timing when the effect image for the temporary stop notification is hidden.

On the other hand, when an active display change preview performance is executed as a preview performance, as shown in Figure 20-11 (A) and Figures 20-11 (D) to 20-11 (F), an effect image for notifying a temporary stop is displayed on the image display device 5 from the timing when the pseudo consecutive patterns temporarily stop, and an image of the active display change preview performance (in this modified example 225SG-5, an image of an arrow with a left-right width dimension of L2 (L1>L2) flying from the right part of the image display device 5 toward the active display area 225SG005F) is displayed.

When the display mode of the active display changes as a result of the active display change notice performance, as shown in FIG. 20-11 (E), an arrow coming from the right side of the image display device 5 pierces the active display, causing the display mode of the active display to change. When the display mode of the active display does not change as a result of the active display change notice performance, as shown in FIG. 20-11 (F), an arrow coming from the right side of the image display device 5 passes toward the left side of the image display device 5 without piercing the active display, and then becomes invisible.

In this way, in this modified example 225SG-5, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for a temporary stop notification is displayed on the image display device 5 together with an image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect, making the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect temporarily invisible to the player, whereas when an active display change preview effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for a temporary stop notification is not displayed on the image display device 5, and an image (arrow image) with a shorter display dimension than the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is displayed as the image for the active display change preview effect, thereby preventing the active display change preview effect from being obscured by the effect image for the temporary stop notification and becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in this modified example 225SG-5, when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an image with a left-right width dimension of L1 is displayed as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect on the upper part of the image display device 5 based on the pseudo consecutive pattern being temporarily stopped as a result of the temporary stop preview effect, and an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transparency of 0% is displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect is executed as a preview effect, an effect image for temporary stop notification with a transparency other than 0% (for example, a transparency of 20% or 50%) may be displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 together with the image as a pseudo consecutive suggestion effect.

In addition, in the feature 193SG and the feature 225SG, a pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) that notifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by changing the display mode of the reserved memory display or the like at the timing of the end of the variable display, it is possible to execute a reserved memory display change performance that suggests that the variable display result corresponding to the reserved memory display will be a jackpot, and a case may be provided in which a pattern (reserved memory display change notification pattern) indicating that the reserved memory display will change is stopped on the image display device 5 as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative pattern. In this way, when the reserved memory display change notification pattern stops on the image display device 5, it is possible to execute a performance (suggestion performance in the present invention) equivalent to the temporary stop suggestion performance in the feature 193SG or the feature 225SG, targeting whether or not the reserved memory display change notification pattern stops.

In addition, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a pattern (pseudo consecutive pattern) that notifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of images can be displayed as background images on the image display device 5, and the probability that the variable display result being executed will be a jackpot can be suggested according to the background image being displayed. In addition, a pattern (background image change notification pattern) indicating that the background image will change can be stopped on the image display device 5 as one of a plurality of decorative patterns or as a pattern different from the decorative patterns. In this way, when the background image change notification pattern stops on the image display device 5, a performance (suggestion performance in the present invention) equivalent to the temporary stop suggestion performance in the feature unit 193SG or the feature unit 225SG can be executed based on whether or not the background image change notification pattern stops.

In addition, in the characteristic section 193SG, a pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified as a gaming machine that performs a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs a predetermined game may be a pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine, or a general game machine, as long as it at least performs a predetermined game.

In addition, although this specification has given examples of multiple characteristic features and variations as configurations of the gaming machine of the present invention, the gaming machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining these multiple characteristic features and variations, or may implement only one characteristic feature or variation.

For example, in the feature unit 193SG and the feature unit 225SG, a form has been exemplified in which a symbol (pseudo consecutive symbol) that indicates that a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed is temporarily stopped on the image display device 5 as one symbol out of a plurality of decorative symbols, or as a symbol different from the decorative symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to suggest a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a combination of decorative symbols (stopping symbols), and to execute a performance equivalent to the temporary stop suggestion performance in the feature unit 193SG or the feature unit 225SG (suggestion performance in the present invention) for the stopping of a symbol that suggests that a specific setting value has been set.

LIST OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning port 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board 13 ... Sound control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal pattern display device 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball hitting operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122...RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I/O
120 ... Performance control CPU
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A suggestion performance execution means for suggesting that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state and capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including at least a first suggestion performance and a second suggestion performance having different expectations depending on the performance mode;
a special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a plurality of special images in sequence and displaying a special display that allows a player to specify the number of the displayed special images ;
and a special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that changes the suggestive effect being executed in one performance mode to a performance mode having a higher expectation than the one performance mode by using the displayed special image,
The first suggestion performance is executed at a specific position,
The special image display effect execution means displays the special image in a manner that the special image moves so as to pass through a display position of the suggestion effect that is a target of the special effect during a period before the special effect is executed,
The special effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect by a predetermined pattern of performing a first special effect that changes the presentation mode of the first suggestive effect after the special image is stopped at the specific position, and a specific pattern of performing a second special effect that changes the presentation mode of the second suggestive effect after the special image passes the specific position without being stopped at the specific position,
The ratio of the advantageous state is different when the first special effect is executed by the predetermined pattern and when the second special effect is executed by the specific pattern,
The special effect execution means includes:
After executing the first special effect, the second special effect can be executed;
The second special effect can be executed after the first special effect is executed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images